User's Guide Lexmark Printer 436 CX410e CX410de UG En

User Manual: Lexmark Printer 436

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 344 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

CX410 Series
User's Guide
September 2014 www.lexmark.com
Machine type(s):
7527
Model(s):
415, 436
Contents
Safety information.......................................................................................7
Learning about the printer...........................................................................9
Finding information about the printer......................................................................................................9
Selecting a location for the printer..........................................................................................................10
Printer configurations.............................................................................................................................11
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner..................................................................................12
Using the ADF and scanner glass.............................................................................................................13
Understanding the printer control panel....................................................14
Using the printer control panel...............................................................................................................14
Understanding the home screen.............................................................................................................14
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights........................................................16
Using the touch-screen buttons..............................................................................................................16
Setting up and using the home screen applications....................................18
Finding the IP address of the computer..................................................................................................18
Finding the IP address of the printer.......................................................................................................18
Accessing the Embedded Web Server.....................................................................................................18
Customizing the home screen.................................................................................................................19
Understanding the different applications...............................................................................................19
Activating the home screen applications................................................................................................20
Setting up Remote Operator Panel.........................................................................................................23
Exporting and importing a configuration................................................................................................24
Additional printer setup.............................................................................25
Installing internal options........................................................................................................................25
Installing hardware options.....................................................................................................................31
Attaching cables......................................................................................................................................34
Setting up the printer software...............................................................................................................35
Networking..............................................................................................................................................36
Verifying printer setup............................................................................................................................39
Loading paper and specialty media............................................................41
Setting the paper size and type...............................................................................................................41
Contents 2
Configuring Universal paper settings......................................................................................................41
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray......................................................................................................41
Loading the manual feeder.....................................................................................................................44
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray..............................................................................................................45
Loading the multipurpose feeder............................................................................................................46
Linking and unlinking trays......................................................................................................................48
Paper and specialty media guide................................................................51
Using specialty media..............................................................................................................................51
Paper guidelines......................................................................................................................................54
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights.............................................................................................57
Printing......................................................................................................61
Printing forms..........................................................................................................................................61
Printing a document................................................................................................................................61
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device...........................................................................................63
Printing confidential and other held jobs................................................................................................65
Printing information pages......................................................................................................................67
Canceling a print job................................................................................................................................68
Copying......................................................................................................69
Making copies.........................................................................................................................................69
Copying photos........................................................................................................................................70
Copying on specialty media.....................................................................................................................70
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel.......................................................................71
Customizing copy settings.......................................................................................................................71
Placing information on copies.................................................................................................................76
Canceling a copy job................................................................................................................................77
Understanding the copy options.............................................................................................................78
E-mailing....................................................................................................82
Setting up the printer to e-mail...............................................................................................................82
Creating an e-mail shortcut.....................................................................................................................82
E-mailing a document..............................................................................................................................83
Customizing e-mail settings.....................................................................................................................85
Canceling an e-mail.................................................................................................................................85
Understanding the e-mail options..........................................................................................................86
Contents 3
Faxing........................................................................................................89
Setting up the printer to fax....................................................................................................................89
Sending a fax.........................................................................................................................................103
Creating shortcuts.................................................................................................................................106
Customizing fax settings........................................................................................................................106
Canceling an outgoing fax.....................................................................................................................108
Holding and forwarding faxes...............................................................................................................108
Understanding the fax options..............................................................................................................109
Scanning...................................................................................................112
Using Scan to Network..........................................................................................................................112
Scanning to an FTP address...................................................................................................................112
Scanning to a computer or flash drive..................................................................................................114
Understanding the scan options...........................................................................................................116
Understanding printer menus...................................................................119
Menus list..............................................................................................................................................119
Supplies menu.......................................................................................................................................120
Paper menu...........................................................................................................................................120
Reports menu........................................................................................................................................130
Network/Ports.......................................................................................................................................131
Security menu.......................................................................................................................................139
Settings menu........................................................................................................................................143
Saving money and the environment.........................................................193
Saving paper and toner.........................................................................................................................193
Saving energy........................................................................................................................................194
Recycling................................................................................................................................................197
Securing the printer..................................................................................199
Using the security lock feature..............................................................................................................199
Statement of Volatility..........................................................................................................................199
Erasing volatile memory........................................................................................................................200
Erasing non‑volatile memory................................................................................................................200
Erasing printer hard disk memory.........................................................................................................201
Configuring printer hard disk encryption..............................................................................................201
Finding printer security information.....................................................................................................202
Contents 4
Maintaining the printer............................................................................203
Storing supplies.....................................................................................................................................203
Cleaning the printer..............................................................................................................................203
Checking the status of parts and supplies.............................................................................................205
Estimated number of remaining pages.................................................................................................205
Ordering supplies..................................................................................................................................206
Replacing supplies.................................................................................................................................208
Moving the printer................................................................................................................................227
Managing the printer...............................................................................229
Finding advanced networking and administrator information.............................................................229
Checking the virtual display...................................................................................................................229
Setting up e‑mail alerts.........................................................................................................................229
Viewing reports.....................................................................................................................................229
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web Server.......................................................230
Modifying confidential print settings....................................................................................................231
Copying printer settings to other printers.............................................................................................231
Restoring factory default settings.........................................................................................................231
Clearing jams............................................................................................233
Avoiding jams........................................................................................................................................233
Understanding jam messages and locations.........................................................................................234
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]..............................................................................................236
[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]...........................................................................239
[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx].................................................................................................242
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]........................................................................243
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]......................................................................................................244
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]...........................................................................................246
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx].................................................................................246
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx].....................................................................248
Troubleshooting.......................................................................................250
Understanding the printer messages....................................................................................................250
Solving printer problems.......................................................................................................................264
Solving print problems..........................................................................................................................271
Solving copy problems..........................................................................................................................298
Contents 5
Solving fax problems.............................................................................................................................301
Solving scanner problems.....................................................................................................................307
Solving home screen application problems...........................................................................................311
Embedded Web Server does not open.................................................................................................312
Contacting customer support................................................................................................................314
Notices.....................................................................................................315
Product information..............................................................................................................................315
Edition notice........................................................................................................................................315
Power consumption..............................................................................................................................319
Index........................................................................................................333
Contents 6
Safety information
Connect the power cord directly to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the
product and easily accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or other types of surge or UPS devices. The power rating capacity of these types of
accessories can be easily overloaded by a laser printer and may result in poor printer performance, property
damage, or potential fire.
Do not place or use this product near water or wet locations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: This product uses a laser. Use of controls or adjustments or performance of
procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This product uses a printing process that heats the print media, and the heat may cause the media to release emissions.
You must understand the section in your operating instructions that discusses the guidelines for selecting print media
to avoid the possibility of harmful emissions.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced. There is a
danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble, or incinerate a
lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions and local
regulations.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Use only the power cord provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
Use only the telecommunications (RJ‑11) cord provided with this product or a 26 AWG or larger replacement when
connecting this product to the public switched telephone network.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Make sure that all external connections (such as Ethernet and telephone system
connections) are properly installed in their marked plug-in ports.
This product is designed, tested, and approved to meet strict global safety standards with the use of specific
manufacturer's components. The safety features of some parts may not always be obvious. The manufacturer is not
responsible for the use of other replacement parts.
Safety information 7
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not cut, twist, bind, crush, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not
subject the power cord to abrasion or stress. Do not pinch the power cord between objects such as furniture
and walls. If any of these things happen, a risk of fire or electrical shock results. Inspect the power cord regularly
for signs of such problems. Remove the power cord from the electrical outlet before inspecting it.
Refer service or repairs, other than those described in the user documentation, to a service representative.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before proceeding.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Safety information 8
Learning about the printer
Finding information about the printer
What are you looking for? Find it here
Initial setup instructions:
•Connecting the printer
•Installing the printer software
Setup documentation—The setup documentation came
with the printer and is also available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Additional setup and instructions for using the printer:
•Selecting and storing paper and specialty media
•Loading paper
•Configuring printer settings
•Viewing and printing documents and photos
•Setting up and using the printer software
•Configuring the printer on a network
•Caring for and maintaining the printer
•Troubleshooting and solving problems
User's Guide and Quick Reference Guide—The guides are
available at http://support.lexmark.com.
Note: These guides are also available in other
languages.
Information on setting up and configuring the accessibility
features of your printer
Lexmark Accessibility Guide—This guide is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
Help using the printer software Windows or Mac Help—Open a printer software program
or application, and then click Help.
Click
?
to view context‑sensitive information.
Notes:
•Help is automatically installed with the printer
software.
•The printer software is located in the printer
program folder or on the desktop, depending on
your operating system.
Learning about the printer 9
What are you looking for? Find it here
The latest supplemental information, updates, and customer
support:
•Documentation
•Driver downloads
•Live chat support
•E‑mail support
•Voice support
Lexmark support Web site—
http://support.lexmark.com
Note: Select your country or region, and then select
your product to view the appropriate support site.
Support telephone numbers and hours of operation for
your country or region can be found on the support Web
site or on the printed warranty that came with your
printer.
Record the following information (located on the store
receipt and at the back of the printer), and have it ready
when you contact customer support so that they may
serve you faster:
•Machine Type number
•Serial number
•Date purchased
•Store where purchased
Warranty information Warranty information varies by country or region:
•In the U.S.—See the Statement of Limited Warranty
included with this printer, or go to
http://support.lexmark.com.
•In other countries and regions—See the printed
warranty that came with this printer.
Selecting a location for the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
When selecting a location for the printer, leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors. If you plan to install any
options, then leave enough room for them also. It is important to:
•Set up the printer near a properly grounded and easily accessible electrical outlet.
•Make sure airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical Committee
156 standard.
•Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
•Keep the printer:
–Clean, dry, and free of dust.
–Away from stray staples and paper clips.
–Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.
–Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes.
•Observe the recommended temperatures and avoid fluctuations:
Ambient temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Storage temperature -40 to 43°C (-40 to 110°F)
•Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:
Learning about the printer 10
1Right side 304.8 mm (12 in.)
2Front 508 mm (20 in.)
3Left side 76.2 mm (3 in.)
4Rear 101.6 mm (4 in.)
5Top 291.7 mm (11.5 in.)
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Floor-mounted configurations require additional furniture for stability. You must
use either a printer stand or printer base if you are using multiple input options. If you purchased a
multifunction printer (MFP) that scans, copies, and faxes, then you may need additional furniture. For more
information, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
Learning about the printer 11
Basic models
1Printer control panel
2Automatic document feeder (ADF)
3Standard bin
4Top door latch
5Right side cover
6Standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1)
7Manual feeder
8Optional 650-sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
9Optional 550-sheet tray (Tray 3)
Understanding the basic functions of the scanner
•Make quick copies or set the printer to perform specific copy jobs.
•Send a fax using the printer control panel.
•Send a fax to multiple fax destinations at the same time.
•Scan documents and send them to your computer, an e-mail address, or an FTP destination.
•Scan documents and send them to another printer (PDF through an FTP).
Learning about the printer 12
Using the ADF and scanner glass
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including two-
sided (duplex) pages.
Use the scanner glass for single‑page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Using the ADF
When using the ADF:
•Load the document into the ADF tray faceup, short edge first.
•Load up to 50 sheets of plain paper into the ADF tray.
•Scan sizes from 105 x 148 mm (4.1 x 5.8 inches) wide to 216 x 355 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) long.
•Scan media weights from 52 to 120 g/m2 (14 to 32 lb).
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings)
into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Using the scanner glass
When using the scanner glass:
•Place a document facedown on the scanner glass in the corner with the green arrow.
•Scan or copy documents from 216 x 296.9 mm (8.5 x 11.69 inches) dimension.
•Copy books up to 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) thick.
Learning about the printer 13
Understanding the printer control panel
Using the printer control panel
Use the To
1Display •View the printer status and messages.
•Set up and operate the printer.
2Home button Go to the home screen.
3Help button Go to the Help menus.
4Clear all / Reset button Reset the default settings of a function, such as printing, copying, or e-mailing.
5Keypad Enter numbers, letters, or symbols.
6Sleep button Enable Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
7Cancel button Cancel all printer activity.
8Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
9Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
10 USB port Connect a flash drive to the printer.
Note: Only the front USB port supports flash drives.
Understanding the home screen
When the printer is turned on, the display shows a basic screen, referred to as the home screen. Use the home screen
buttons and icons to initiate an action such as copying, faxing, or scanning; to open the menu screen; or respond to
messages.
Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded solutions.
Understanding the printer control panel 14
Touch To
1Copy Access the Copy menus and make copies.
2Fax Access the Fax menus and send fax.
3E‑mail Access the E-mail menus and send e‑mails.
4FTP Access the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) menus and scan documents directly to an FTP server.
5Menu icon Access printer menus.
Note: The menus are available only when the printer is in ready state.
6Status message bar •Show the current printer status such as Ready or Busy.
•Show printer supply conditions such as Imaging unit low or Cartridge Low.
•Show intervention messages and the instructions on how to clear them.
7Status/Supplies •Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention to
continue processing.
•View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
This may also appear on the home screen:
Touch To
Search Held Jobs Search current held jobs.
Jobs by user Access print jobs saved by user.
Profiles and Apps Access profiles and applications.
Features
Feature Description
Attendance message alert If an attendance message affects a function, then this icon appears and the red
indicator light blinks.
Understanding the printer control panel 15
Feature Description
Warning If an error condition occurs, then this icon appears.
Printer IP address
Example: 123.123.123.123
The IP address of your printer is located at the top left corner of the home screen
and appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods. You can use the IP address
when accessing the Embedded Web Server to view and remotely configure printer
settings even when you are not physically near the printer.
Understanding the colors of the Sleep button and indicator
lights
The colors of the Sleep button and indicator lights on the control panel signify a printer status or condition.
Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blinking green The printer is warming up, processing data, or printing.
Solid green The printer is on, but idle.
Blinking red The printer requires user intervention.
Sleep button light Printer status
Off The printer is off, idle, or in Ready state.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is entering or waking from Hibernate mode.
Blinking amber for 0.1 second, then goes
completely off for 1.9 seconds in a slow,
pulsing pattern
The printer is in Hibernate mode.
Using the touch-screen buttons
Note: Your home screen, icons, and buttons may vary, depending on your home screen customization settings,
administrative setup, and active embedded solutions.
Understanding the printer control panel 16
763
4
1
52
Touch To
1Arrows View a list of options.
2Copy It Print a copy.
3Advanced Options Select a copy option.
4Home Go to the home screen.
5Increase Select a higher value.
6Decrease Select a lower value.
7Tips Open a context-sensitive Help dialog.
Other touch-screen buttons
Touch To
Accept Save a setting.
Cancel •Cancel an action or a selection.
•Exit a screen and return to the previous screen without saving changes.
Reset Reset values on the screen.
Understanding the printer control panel 17
Setting up and using the home screen applications
Notes:
•Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative setup, and
active embedded applications. Some applications are supported only in some printer models.
•There may be additional solutions and applications available for purchase. For more information, go to
www.lexmark.com or contact the place where you purchased the printer.
Finding the IP address of the computer
For Windows users
1In the Run dialog box, type cmd to open the command prompt.
2Type ipconfig, and then look for the IP address.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, select Network.
2Select your connection type, and then click Advanced > TCP/IP.
3Look for the IP address.
Finding the IP address of the printer
Note: Make sure your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
You can find the printer IP address:
•From the top left corner of the printer home screen.
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Accessing the Embedded Web Server
The Embedded Web Server is the printer Web page that lets you view and remotely configure printer settings even
when you are not physically near the printer.
1Obtain the printer IP address:
•From the printer control panel home screen
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 18
3Press Enter.
Note: If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
Customizing the home screen
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do one or more of the following:
•Show or hide the icons of basic printer functions.
aClick Settings > General Settings > Home screen customization.
bSelect the check boxes to specify which icons appear on the home screen.
Note: If you clear a check box beside an icon, then the icon does not appear on the home screen.
cClick Submit.
•Customize the icon for an application. For more information, see “Finding information about the home screen
applications” on page 20 or see the documentation that came with the application.
Understanding the different applications
Use To
Card Copy Scan and print both sides of a card on a single page. For more information, see “Setting up Card Copy”
on page 21.
Fax Scan a document, and then send it to a fax number. For more information, see “Faxing” on page
89.
Forms and Favorites Quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly from the printer home screen. For more
information, see “Setting up Forms and Favorites” on page 20.
Multi Send Scan a document, and then send it to multiple destinations. For more information, see “Setting up
Multi Send” on page 22.
MyShortcut Create shortcuts directly on the printer home screen. For more information, see “Using MyShortcut”
on page 21.
Scan to E‑mail Scan a document, and then send it to an e‑mail address. For more information, see “E-mailing” on
page 82.
Scan to Computer Scan a document, and then save it to a predefined folder on a host computer. For more information,
see “Setting up Scan to Computer” on page 115.
Scan to FTP Scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. For more information, see “Scanning
to an FTP address” on page 112.
Scan to Network Scan a document, and then send it to a network shared folder. For more information, see “Setting
up Scan to Network” on page 22.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 19
Activating the home screen applications
Finding information about the home screen applications
Your printer comes with preinstalled home screen applications. Before you can use these applications, you must first
activate and set up these applications using the Embedded Web Server. For more information on accessing the
Embedded Web Server, see “Accessing the Embedded Web Server” on page 18.
For more information on configuring and using the home screen applications, do the following:
1Go to http://support.lexmark.com.
2Click Software Solutions, and then select either of the following:
•Scan to Network—This lets you find information about the Scan to Network application.
•Other Applications—This lets you find information about the other applications.
3Click the Manuals tab, and then select the document for the home screen application.
Setting up Forms and Favorites
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User’s Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Streamline work processes by letting you quickly find and print frequently used online forms directly
from the printer home screen.
Note: The printer must have permission to access the network folder, FTP site, or Web site where the
bookmark is stored. From the computer where the bookmark is stored, use sharing, security, and
firewall settings to allow the printer at least a read access. For help, see the documentation that
came with your operating system.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Forms and Favorites.
3Click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the bookmark are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the bookmark is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of the host
computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the bookmark is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Forms and Favorites on the printer home screen, and then navigate through form
categories, or search for forms based on a form number, name, or description.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 20
Setting up Card Copy
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Quickly and easily copy insurance, identification, and other wallet‑size cards.
You can scan and print both sides of a card on a single page, saving paper and showing the information
on the card in a more convenient manner.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Card Copy.
3Change the default scanning options, if necessary.
•Default tray—Select the default tray to be used for printing scan images.
•Default number of copies—Specify the number of copies that should automatically print when the application
is used.
•Default contrast setting—Specify a setting to increase or decrease the level of contrast when a copy of the
scanned card is printed. Select Best for Content if you want the printer to adjust the contrast automatically.
•Default scale setting—Set the size of the scanned card when printed. The default setting is 100% (full size).
•Color Output—Select the check box to print the scanned card in color, or clear it to scan in black and white.
•Resolution setting—Adjust the quality of the scanned card.
Notes:
–When scanning a card, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 200 dpi for color, and 400 dpi for
black and white.
–When scanning multiple cards, make sure the scan resolution is not more than 150 dpi for color, and
300 dpi for black and white.
•Print Borders—Select the check box to print the scan image with a border around it.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Card Copy on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions.
Using MyShortcut
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 21
Use To
Create shortcuts on the printer home screen, with settings for up to 25 frequently used copy, fax, or e-
mail jobs.
To use the application, touch MyShortcut, and then follow the instructions on the printer display.
Setting up Multi Send
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator's Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Use To
Scan a document, and then send the scanned document to multiple destinations.
Note: Make sure there is enough space in the printer hard disk.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The printer IP address appears as four sets of
numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Multi Send.
3From the Profiles section, click Add, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse‑over help beside each field for a description of the setting.
•If you select FTP or Share Folder as a destination, then make sure the location settings of the destination are
correct. Type the correct IP address of the host computer where the specified destination is located. For
more information on obtaining the IP address of the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the
computer” on page 18.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Multi Send on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the printer
display.
Setting up Scan to Network
Note: A later version of this User's Guide may contain a direct link to the Administrator’s Guide of this application. To
check for updates of this User's Guide, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 22
Use To
Scan a document and send it to a shared network folder. You can define up to 30 unique folder
destinations.
Notes:
•The printer must have permission to write to the destinations. From the computer where the
destination is specified, use sharing, security, and firewall settings to allow the printer at least a
write access. For help, see the documentation that came with your operating system.
•The Scan to Network icon appears only when one or more destinations are defined.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Do either of the following:
•Click Set up Scan to Network > Click here.
•Click Settings > Apps > Apps Management > Scan to Network.
3Specify the destinations, and then customize the settings.
Notes:
•See the mouse-over help beside some of the fields for a description of the setting.
•To make sure the location settings of the destination are correct, type the correct IP address of the host
computer where the specified destination is located. For more information on obtaining the IP address of
the host computer, see “Finding the IP address of the computer” on page 18.
•Make sure the printer has access rights to the folder where the specified destination is located.
4Click Apply.
To use the application, touch Scan to Network on the printer home screen, and then follow the instructions on the
printer display.
Setting up Remote Operator Panel
This application enables you to interact with the printer control panel even when you are not physically near the network
printer. From your computer, you can view the printer status, release held print jobs, create bookmarks, and do other
print-related tasks.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Click Settings > Remote Operator Panel Settings.
3Select the Enable check box, and then customize the settings.
4Click Submit.
To use the application, click Remote Operator Panel > Launch VNC Applet.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 23
Exporting and importing a configuration
You can export configuration settings into a text file, and then import the file to apply the settings to other printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Note: View the IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
2Export or import a configuration file for one or multiple applications.
For one application
aNavigate to:
Settings > Apps > Apps Management > select an application > Configure
bExport or import the configuration file.
Notes:
•If a JVM Out of Memory error occurs, then repeat the export process until the configuration file is
saved.
•If a timeout occurs and a blank screen appears, then refresh the Web browser, and then click Apply.
For multiple applications
aClick Settings > Import/Export.
bExport or import a configuration file.
Note: When importing a configuration file, click Submit to complete the process.
Setting up and using the home screen applications 24
Additional printer setup
Installing internal options
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electircal outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
Available internal options
•Memory card
–DDR3 DIMM
•Flash memory
–Fonts
–Firmware
•Forms and Barcode
•Prescribe
•IPDS
Note: The printer hard disk is an optional memory device that can be attached to the rear USB port of the printer.
Additional printer setup 25
Accessing the controller board
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Access the controller board at the back of the printer.
Note: This task requires a flat‑head screwdriver.
2Turn the screws counterclockwise to remove them.
3Slightly open the controller board access cover, and then shift to the right to remove it.
2
1
4Locate the appropriate connector on the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch something metal on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or
connectors.
Additional printer setup 26
12
1Memory card connector
2Option card connector
5Reattach the cover.
1
2
Additional printer setup 27
6Turn the screws clockwise to lock the cover.
Installing a memory card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 26.
2Unpack the memory card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the connection points along the edge of the card. Doing so may
cause damage.
Additional printer setup 28
3Align the notch (1) on the memory card with the ridge (2) on the connector.
21
4Push the memory card straight into the connector, and then push the card toward the controller board wall until
it clicks into place.
1
2
5Close the controller board access cover.
Additional printer setup 29
Installing an optional card
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have other devices attached to the printer, then turn them
off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Controller board electronic components are easily damaged by static electricity.
Touch a metal surface on the printer before touching any controller board electronic components or connectors.
1Access the controller board.
For more information, see “Accessing the controller board” on page 26.
2Unpack the optional card.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid touching the connection points along the edge of the card.
3Holding the card by its sides, align the plastic pins (1) on the card with the holes (2) on the controller board.
2
1
Additional printer setup 30
4Push the card firmly into place as shown in the illustration.
Warning—Potential Damage: Improper installation of the card may cause damage to the card and the
controller board.
Note: The entire length of the connector on the card must touch and be flushed against the controller board.
5Close the controller board access door.
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, it may be necessary to manually add
the options in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding
available options in the print driver” on page 35.
Installing hardware options
Order of installation
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
Additional printer setup 31
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
Install the printer and any optional tray in the following order:
•Optional 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3)
•Optional 650‑sheet duo tray with integrated multipurpose feeder (Tray 2)
•Printer
Installing optional trays
The printer supports two optional input sources: a 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) and a 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2) with an
integrated multipurpose feeder.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: If you are accessing the controller board or installing optional hardware or
memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn the printer off, and unplug the power cord
from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any other devices attached to the printer, then turn
them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the printer.
1Unpack the optional tray and the dust cover, and then remove all packing material.
2Place the tray near the printer.
3Align the 650‑sheet duo tray with the 550‑sheet tray, and then lower it into place.
Notes:
•If you are installing both the optional trays, then the 550‑sheet tray (Tray 3) must always be below the
650‑sheet tray (Tray 2).
•The standard 250‑sheet tray can be labeled as Tray 1 by using the tray number label that came with the
optional tray.
Additional printer setup 32
4Align the printer with the 650‑sheet duo tray, and then lower the printer into place.
5Install the dust covers.
Additional printer setup 33
Note: When the printer software and any hardware options are installed, you may need to manually add the options
in the printer driver to make them available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available options in
the print driver” on page 35.
Attaching cables
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product
or make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a
lightning storm.
Connect the printer to the computer using a USB cable or to the network using an Ethernet cable.
Make sure to match the following:
•The USB symbol on the cable with the USB symbol on the printer
•The appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any network adapter, or the printer in the area shown
while actively printing. Loss of data or a malfunction can occur.
6
71
2
4
3
5
Use the To
1Rear USB port Attach an optional wireless network adapter or an optional printer hard disk.
2Security lock port Lock the controller board.
3Printer power cord
socket
Connect the printer to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
4LINE port Connect the printer to an active telephone line through a standard wall jack (RJ‑11), DSL
filter, or VoIP adapter, or any other adapter that allows you to access the telephone line to
send and receive faxes.
Additional printer setup 34
Use the To
5EXT port Connect additional devices (telephone or answering machine) to the printer and the
telephone line. Use this port if you do not have a dedicated fax line for the printer and if this
connection method is supported in your country or region.
Note: Remove the plug to access the port.
6USB printer port Connect the printer to a computer using a USB cable.
7Ethernet port Connect the printer to an Ethernet network.
Setting up the printer software
Installing the printer
1Obtain a copy of the software installer package.
2Run the installer, and then follow the instructions on the computer screen.
3For Macintosh users, add the printer.
Note: Obtain the printer IP address from the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu.
Adding available options in the print driver
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder.
In Windows 8
From the Search charm, type run, and then navigate to:
Run > type control printers > OK
In Windows 7 or earlier
aClick , or click Start and then click Run.
bType control printers.
cPress Enter, or click OK.
2Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
•For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
•For earlier versions, select Properties.
3Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4Apply the changes.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
Additional printer setup 35
3Apply the changes.
Networking
Notes:
•Purchase a MarkNetTM N8352 wireless network adapter before setting up the printer on a wireless network. For
information on installing the wireless network adapter, see the instruction sheet that came with the adapter.
•A Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name assigned to a wireless network. Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP), Wi-Fi
Protected Access (WPA), WPA2, and 802.1X - RADIUS are types of security used on a network.
Preparing to set up the printer on an Ethernet network
To configure your printer to connect to an Ethernet network, organize the following information before you begin:
Note: If your network automatically assigns IP addresses to computers and printers, continue on to installing the
printer.
•A valid, unique IP address for the printer to use on the network
•The network gateway
•The network mask
•A nickname for the printer (optional)
Note: A printer nickname can make it easier for you to identify your printer on the network. You can choose to
use the default printer nickname, or assign a name that is easier for you to remember.
You will need an Ethernet cable to connect the printer to the network and an available port where the printer can
physically connect to the network. Use a new network cable when possible to avoid potential problems caused by a
damaged cable.
Preparing to set up the printer on a wireless network
Notes:
•Make sure your wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•Make sure your access point (wireless router) is turned on and is working properly.
Make sure you have the following information before setting up the printer on a wireless network:
•SSID—The SSID is also referred to as the network name.
•Wireless Mode (or Network Mode)—The mode is either infrastructure or ad hoc.
•Channel (for ad hoc networks)—The channel defaults to automatic for infrastructure networks.
Some ad hoc networks will also require the automatic setting. Check with your system support person if you are
not sure which channel to select.
Additional printer setup 36
•Security Method—There are four basic options for Security Method:
–WEP key
If your network uses more than one WEP key, then enter up to four in the provided spaces. Select the key
currently in use on the network by selecting the default WEP transmit key.
–WPA or WPA2 preshared key or passphrase
WPA includes encryption as an additional layer of security. The choices are AES or TKIP. Encryption must be set
for the same type on the router and on the printer, or the printer will not be able to communicate on the
network.
–802.1X–RADIUS
If you are installing the printer on an 802.1X network, then you may need the following:
•Authentication type
•Inner authentication type
•802.1X user name and password
•Certificates
–No security
If your wireless network does not use any type of security, then you will not have any security information.
Note: We do not recommend using an unsecured wireless network.
Notes:
–If you do not know the SSID of the network that your computer is connected to, then launch the wireless utility
of the computer network adapter, and then look for the network name. If you cannot find the SSID or the
security information for your network, then see the documentation that came with the access point, or contact
your system support person.
–To find the WPA/WPA2 preshared key or passphrase for the wireless network, see the documentation that
came with the access point, see the Embedded Web Server associated with the access point, or consult your
system support person.
Connecting the printer using the Wireless Setup Wizard
Before you begin, make sure that:
•A wireless network adapter is installed in the printer and is working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
•An Ethernet cable is disconnected from the printer.
•Active NIC is set to Auto. To set this to Auto, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Active NIC > Auto >
Note: Make sure to turn off the printer, then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup
2Select a wireless connection setup.
Additional printer setup 37
Use To
Search for networks Show available wireless connections.
Note: This menu shows all broadcast secured or unsecured SSIDs.
Enter a network name Manually type the SSID.
Note: Make sure to type the correct SSID.
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup Connect the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup.
3Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Before you begin, make sure that:
•The access point (wireless router) is Wi‑Fi Protected Setup (WPS) certified or WPS‑compatible. For more
information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
•A wireless network adapter installed in your printer is attached and working properly. For more information, see
the instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
Using the Push Button Configuration method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start Push Button Method
2Follow the instructions on the printer display.
Using the Personal Identification Number (PIN) method
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless > Wireless Connection Setup > Wi‑Fi Protected
Setup > Start PIN Method
2Copy the eight‑digit WPS PIN.
3Open a Web browser, and then type the IP address of your access point in the address field.
Notes:
•The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
4Access the WPS settings. For more information, see the documentation that came with your access point.
5Enter the eight‑digit PIN, and then save the setting.
Additional printer setup 38
Connecting the printer to a wireless network using the Embedded Web Server
Before you begin, make sure that:
•Your printer is connected temporarily to an Ethernet network.
•A wireless network adapter is installed in your printer and working properly. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the wireless network adapter.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer control panel. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Network/Ports > Wireless.
3Modify the settings to match the settings of your access point (wireless router).
Note: Make sure to enter the correct SSID, security method, preshared key or passphrase, network mode, and
channel.
4Click Submit.
5Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the Ethernet cable. Then wait for at least five seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
6To verify if your printer is connected to the network, print a network setup page. Then in the Network Card [x]
section, see if the status is Connected.
Verifying printer setup
When all hardware and software options are installed and the printer is turned on, verify that the printer is set up
correctly by printing the following:
•Menu settings page—Use this page to verify that all printer options are installed correctly. If an option you installed
is not listed, then it is not installed correctly. Remove the option, and then install it again.
•Network setup page—If your printer has networking support, then use this page to verify that the network
connection is working. This page also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
Printing a menu settings page
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Menu Settings Page
Additional printer setup 39
Printing a network setup page
If the printer is attached to a network, then print a network setup page to verify the network connection. This page
also provides important information that aids network printing configuration.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Network Setup Page
2Check the first section of the network setup page, and confirm that the status is Connected.
If the status is Not Connected, then the LAN drop may not be active, or the network cable may be malfunctioning.
Consult a system support person for a solution, and then print another network setup page.
Additional printer setup 40
Loading paper and specialty media
Proper selection and loading of media can improve how reliably documents print. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 233 and “Storing paper” on page 57.
Setting the paper size and type
From the home screen navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Paper Size/Type > select a tray > select the paper size or type >
Configuring Universal paper settings
The Universal paper size is a user‑defined setting that lets you print on paper sizes that are not preset in the printer
menus.
Notes:
•The smallest supported Universal size is 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) and is loaded only in the multipurpose
feeder and manual feeder.
•The largest supported Universal size is 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 inches) and is loaded only in the
multipurpose feeder and manual feeder.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Universal Setup > Units of Measure > select a unit of measure
2Touch Portrait Width or Portrait Height.
3Select the width or height, and then touch .
Loading the 250‑ and 550‑sheet tray
The printer has one 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) with an integrated manual feeder. The 250-sheet tray, the 650-sheet duo
tray, and the 550-sheet tray support the same paper sizes and types and are loaded in the same way.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1Pull out the tray completely.
Note: Do not remove trays while a job is printing or while Busy appears on the display. Doing so may cause a
jam.
Loading paper and specialty media 41
2If the paper is longer than letter‑size paper, then squeeze and then slide the length guide at the back of the tray to
extend it.
2
1
3Squeeze, and then slide the length guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
2
1
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guide.
Loading paper and specialty media 42
4Squeeze, and then slide the width guide tab to the correct position for the size of the paper being loaded.
2
1
Note: Use the paper size indicators on the bottom of the tray to help position the guides.
5Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
6Load the paper stack with the recommended printable side faceup.
7Place the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.
Loading paper and specialty media 43
8Insert the tray.
9From the printer control panel, set the paper size and paper type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in
the tray.
Note: Mixing paper sizes or paper types in a tray may cause jams.
Loading the manual feeder
The standard 250‑sheet tray has an integrated manual feeder that can be used to print on different types of paper one
sheet at a time.
1Load a sheet of paper into the manual feeder:
•Printable side facedown for one-sided printing
•Printable side faceup for two‑sided (duplex) printing
Note: There are different ways for loading letterhead depending on the mode of printing.
One‑sided printing using a letterhead Two‑sided printing using a letterhead
ABC
ABC
•Load envelope with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
2Feed paper into the manual feeder only to the point where its leading edge can contact the paper guides.
Note: To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high‑quality media designed for laser printers.
3Adjust the paper guides to the width of the paper loaded.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not force the paper into the feeder. Forcing the paper may cause jams.
Loading paper and specialty media 44
Loading the 650‑sheet duo tray
The 650‑sheet duo tray (Tray 2) consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated 100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The tray
is loaded in the same way as the 250‑sheet tray and the optional 550‑sheet tray, and supports the same paper types
and sizes. The only differences are the look of the guide tabs and the location of the paper size indicators.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately. Keep all
other trays closed until needed.
1
2
3
1Length guide tab
2Paper size indicator
3Width guide tab
Loading paper and specialty media 45
Loading the multipurpose feeder
1Push the multipurpose feeder latch to the left.
2Open the multipurpose feeder.
3Pull the multipurpose feeder extender.
Note: Guide the extender gently so that the multipurpose feeder is fully extended and open.
Loading paper and specialty media 46
4Prepare the paper for loading.
•Flex the sheets of paper back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper.
Straighten the edges on a level surface.
•Hold transparencies by the edges, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Note: Avoid touching the printable side of transparencies. Be careful not to scratch them.
•Flex a stack of envelopes back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Straighten the edges on a level
surface.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use envelopes with stamps, clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, or
self‑stick adhesives. These envelopes may severely damage the printer.
5Locate the maximum paper fill indicator and tab.
Note: Make sure the paper or specialty media is below the maximum paper fill indicator located on the paper
guides.
1Width guide tab
2Maximum paper fill indicator
3Width guide
4Feeder extender
Loading paper and specialty media 47
5Paper size indicator
6Load the paper, and then adjust the width guide to lightly touch the edge of the paper stack.
•Load paper, card stock, and transparencies with the recommended printable side facedown and the top edge
entering the printer first.
•Load envelopes with the flap side up and against the right side of the paper guide.
Notes:
•Do not load or close the multipurpose feeder while a job is printing.
•Load only one size and type of paper at a time.
•Paper should lie flat in the multipurpose feeder. Make sure the paper fits loosely in the multipurpose feeder
and is not bent or wrinkled.
7From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the
tray.
Linking and unlinking trays
The printer links trays when the specified paper size and type are the same. When a linked tray becomes empty, paper
feeds from the next linked tray. To prevent trays from linking, assign a unique custom paper type name.
Linking and unlinking trays
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Loading paper and specialty media 48
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu.
3Change the paper size and type settings for the trays you are linking.
•To link trays, make sure the paper size and type for the tray match that of the other tray.
•To unlink trays, make sure the paper size or type for the tray does not match that of the other tray.
4Click Submit.
Note: You can also change the paper size and type settings using the printer control panel. For more information,
see “Setting the paper size and type” on page 41.
Warning—Potential Damage: Paper loaded in the tray should match the paper type name assigned in the printer.
The temperature of the fuser varies according to the specified paper type. Printing issues may occur if settings are
not properly configured.
Creating a custom name for a paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Names.
3Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
4Click Submit.
5Click Custom Types, and then verify if the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Names
2Select a custom name, and then type a custom paper type name.
3Touch .
4Touch Custom Types, and then verify that the new custom paper type name has replaced the custom name.
Assigning a custom paper type
Using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a custom paper type name to a tray when linking or unlinking trays.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Loading paper and specialty media 49
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom paper type name, and then select a paper type
Note: Paper is the factory default paper type for all user‑defined custom names.
3Touch .
Configuring a custom name
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Paper Menu > Custom Types.
3Select a custom name you want to configure, then select a paper or specialty media type, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Paper Menu > Custom Types
2Select a custom name you want to configure, and then touch .
Loading paper and specialty media 50
Paper and specialty media guide
Notes:
•Make sure that the paper size, type, and weight are set correctly on the computer or on the control panel.
•Flex, fan, and straighten specialty media before loading them.
•The printer may print at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•For more information on card stock and labels, see the Card Stock & Label Guide on the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Using specialty media
Tips on using letterhead
•Use letterhead designed specifically for laser printers.
•Print a test page on the letterhead being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Before loading letterhead, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
•Page orientation is important when printing on letterhead.
Source Printing Printable side Paper orientation
Trays One‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Trays
ABC
Two‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 51
Source Printing Printable side Paper orientation
Manual feeder
ABC
One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Manual feeder
ABC
Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder One‑sided Facedown Load the sheet
with the top edge
entering the
printer first.
Multipurpose feeder Two‑sided Faceup Load the sheet
with the bottom
edge entering the
printer first.
Note: Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether or not the preprinted letterhead is acceptable
for laser printers.
Paper and specialty media guide 52
Tips on using transparencies
Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
transparencies loaded in the tray.
•Print a test page on the transparencies being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Feed transparencies from the 250-sheet tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
•Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers.
•Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies to prevent print quality problems.
•Before loading transparencies, flex, fan, and straighten the stacks to prevent sheets from sticking together.
Tips on using envelopes
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the
envelopes loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the envelopes being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Use envelopes designed specifically for laser printers.
•For best performance, use envelopes made from 90‑g/m2 (24‑lb) paper or 25% cotton.
•Use only new envelopes from undamaged packages.
•To optimize performance and minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–Have excessive curl or twist.
–Are stuck together or damaged in any way.
–Have windows, holes, perforations, cutouts, or embossing.
–Have metal clasps, string ties, or folding bars.
–Have an interlocking design.
–Have postage stamps attached.
–Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position.
–Have bent corners.
–Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes.
•Adjust the width guides to fit the width of the envelopes.
•Before loading the envelopes on the tray, flex and fan the envelopes to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Note: A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and high printing temperature may wrinkle or seal envelopes.
Tips on using labels
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the labels
loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on labels being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•For more information on label printing, characteristics, and design, see the Card Stock & Label Guide at
http://support.lexmark.com.
•Use labels designed specifically for laser printers.
•Do not use labels with slick backing material.
Paper and specialty media guide 53
•Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing, resulting in a jam. Partial sheets
also contaminate the printer and the cartridge with adhesive, and could void the printer and toner cartridge
warranties.
•Do not use labels with exposed adhesive.
•Before loading labels on the tray, flex and fan labels to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a level surface.
Tips on using card stock
Card stock is heavy, single‑ply specialty media. Many of its variable characteristics, such as moisture content, thickness,
and texture, can significantly affect print quality.
•From the printer control panel, set the paper size, type, texture, and weight in the Paper menu to match the card
stock loaded in the tray.
•Print samples on the card stock being considered for use before buying large quantities.
•Specify the paper texture and weight from the tray settings to match the paper loaded in the tray.
•Preprinting, perforation, and creasing may significantly affect the print quality and cause jams or other paper feed
problems.
•Before loading the card stock on the tray, flex and fan the card stock to loosen them. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.
Paper guidelines
Select the correct paper or specialty media to reduce printing problems. For the best print quality, try a sample of the
paper or specialty media before buying large quantities.
Paper characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. Consider these characteristics when evaluating
new paper stock.
Weight
The printer trays can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. The multipurpose
feeder can automatically feed paper weights up to 176‑g/m2 (47‑lb) bond grain long paper. Paper lighter than
60 g/m2 (16 lb) might not be stiff enough to feed properly, causing jams. For best performance, use 75‑g/m2 (20‑lb)
bond grain long paper. For paper smaller than 182 x 257 mm (7.2 x 10.1 inches), we recommend 90 g/m2 (24 lb) or
heavier paper.
Note: Duplex printing is supported from 60–105‑g/m2 (16–28‑lb) bond grain long paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency for paper to curl at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper feeding problems. Curl can occur after
the paper passes through the printer, where it is exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in hot, humid,
cold, or dry conditions, even in the trays, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Paper and specialty media guide 54
Smoothness
Paper smoothness directly affects print quality. If paper is too rough, then toner cannot fuse to it properly. If paper is
too smooth, then it can cause paper feeding or print quality issues. Always use paper between 100 and 300 Sheffield
points; smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points produces the best print quality.
Moisture content
The amount of moisture in paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer to feed the paper correctly.
Leave paper in its original wrapper until it is time to use it. This limits the exposure of paper to moisture changes that
can degrade its performance.
Store paper in its original wrapper in the same environment as the printer for 24 to 48 hours before printing. Extend
the time to several days if the storage or transportation environment is very different from the printer environment.
Thick paper may also require a longer conditioning period.
Grain direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either grain long, running the length of
the paper, or grain short, running the width of the paper.
For 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) bond paper, grain long paper is recommended.
Fiber content
Most high‑quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically treated pulped wood. This content provides the
paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding problems and better print quality. Paper containing
fibers such as cotton can negatively affect paper handling.
Unacceptable paper
The following paper types are not recommended for use with the printer:
•Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as carbonless papers, carbonless
copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper
•Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer
•Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser
•Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page) greater than ±2.3 mm (±0.9 in.),
such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms
In some cases, registration can be adjusted with a software application to successfully print on these forms.
•Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers
•Rough‑edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers, or curled papers
•Recycled papers that fail EN12281:2002 (European)
•Paper weighing less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)
•Multiple‑part forms or documents
Selecting paper
Using the appropriate paper prevents jams and helps ensure trouble‑free printing.
Paper and specialty media guide 55
To help avoid paper jams and poor print quality:
•Always use new, undamaged paper.
•Before loading paper, know the recommended printable side of the paper. This information is usually indicated on
the paper package.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, types, or weights in the same tray; mixing results in jams.
•Do not use coated papers unless they are specifically designed for electrophotographic printing.
Selecting preprinted forms and letterhead
Use these guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead:
•Use grain long for 60–90‑g/m2 (16–24‑lb) paper.
•Use only forms and letterhead printed using an offset lithographic or engraved printing process.
•Avoid paper with rough or heavily textured surfaces.
Use inks that are not affected by the resin in toner. Inks that are oxidation‑set or oil‑based generally meet these
requirements; latex inks might not.
When in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Using recycled paper and other office papers
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser (electrophotographic) printers. In 1998, Lexmark presented to the US government a study demonstrating
that recycled paper produced by major mills in the US fed as well as non-recycled paper. However, no blanket statement
can be made that all recycled paper will feed well.
Lexmark consistently tests its printers with recycled paper (20–100% post-consumer waste) and a variety of test paper
from around the world, using chamber tests for different temperature and humidity conditions. Lexmark has found no
reason to discourage the use of today's recycled office papers, but generally the following property guidelines apply
to recycled paper.
•Low moisture content (4–5%)
•Suitable smoothness (100–200 Sheffield units, or 140–350 Bendtsen units, European)
Note: Some much smoother papers (such as premium 24 lb laser papers, 50–90 Sheffield units) and much
rougher papers (such as premium cotton papers, 200–300 Sheffield units) have been engineered to work very
well in laser printers, despite surface texture. Before using these types of paper, consult your paper supplier.
•Suitable sheet-to-sheet coefficient of friction (0.4–0.6)
•Sufficient bending resistance in the direction of feed
Recycled paper, paper of lower weight (<60 g/m2 [16 lb bond]) and/or lower caliper (<3.8 mils [0.1 mm]), and paper
that is cut grain-short for portrait (or short-edge) fed printers may have lower bending resistance than is required for
reliable paper feeding. Before using these types of paper for laser (electrophotographic) printing, consult your paper
supplier. Remember that these are general guidelines only and that paper meeting these guidelines may still cause
paper feeding problems in any laser printer (for example, if the paper curls excessively under normal printing
conditions).
Paper and specialty media guide 56
Storing paper
Use these paper storage guidelines to help avoid jams and uneven print quality:
•For best results, store paper where the temperature is 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40 percent. Most
label manufacturers recommend printing in a temperature range of 18–24°C (65–75°F) with relative humidity
between 40 and 60 percent.
•Store paper in cartons, on a pallet or shelf, rather than on the floor.
•Store individual packages on a flat surface.
•Do not store anything on top of individual paper packages.
•Take paper out of the carton or wrapper only when you are ready to load it in the printer. The carton and wrapper
help keep the paper clean, dry, and flat.
Supported paper sizes, types, and weights
The following tables provide information on standard and optional paper sources and the sizes, types, and weights of
paper they support.
Note: For an unlisted paper size, select the closest larger listed size.
Supported paper sizes
Note: Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper sizes as the
optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet
tray
ADF Scanner
glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.3 x 11.7 in.)
1 1 1 1
A5
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.3 in.)
1 2 1 2 X
A6
105 x 148 mm
(4.1 x 5.8 in.)
XX1XX X
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 57
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet
tray
ADF Scanner
glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
JIS B5
182 x 257 mm
(7.2 x 10.1 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Letter
216 x 279 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
1 1 1 1
Legal
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Executive
184 x 267 mm
(7.3 x 10.5 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Oficio (Mexico)
216 x 340 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Folio
216 x 330 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
1 1 1 1 X
Statement
140 x 216 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
X X 1X X
Universal
76 x 127 mm
(3 x 5 in.) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
X1,3 X1,3 X X
Universal
148 x 210 mm
(5.8 x 8.3 in) to
216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 in).
1,2 1,2 1,2 XX 4
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Paper and specialty media guide 58
Paper size and
dimension
Standard
250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet
tray
ADF Scanner
glass
Duplex
mode
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
7 3/4 Envelope
(Monarch)
98 x 191 mm
(3.9 x 7.5 in.)
XX1X XXX
9 Envelope
98 x 225 mm
(3.9 x 8.9 in.)
XX1X XXX
10 Envelope
105 x 241 mm
(4.1 x 9.5 in.)
XX1X XXX
DL Envelope
110 x 220 mm
(4.3 x 8.7 in.)
XX1X XXX
C5 Envelope
162 x 229 mm
(6.4 x 9 in.)
XX1X XXX
B5 Envelope
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XX1X XXX
Other Envelope
98 x 162 mm
(3.9 x 6.3 in.) up to
176 x 250 mm
(6.9 x 9.8 in.)
XX1X XXX
1 The paper source supports paper size without size sensing.
2 Universal is supported in the standard 250‑ and optional 550‑sheet trays only if the paper size is from 148 x 215.9 mm
(5.83 x 8.5 in.) to 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.).
3 Universal is supported in the multipurpose feeder and manual feeder only if the paper size is from 76.2 x 127 mm (3 x 5 in.)
to 215.9 x 359.9 mm (8.5 x 14.17 in.).
4 Universal is supported in duplex mode only if the width is from 210 mm (8.27 in.) to 215.9 mm (8.5 in.), and the length is
from 279.4 mm (11 in.) to 355.6 mm (14 in.).
Supported paper types and weights
Notes:
•Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper as the
550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types, and weights.
•Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at reduced speed.
Paper and specialty media guide 59
Paper type 250‑sheet
tray
Manual
feeder
650‑sheet duo tray 550‑sheet
tray
ADF Scanner
glass
Two‑sided
printing
550‑sheet
tray
Multipurpose
feeder
Paper
•Plain
•Recycled
•Glossy
•Bond
•Letterhead
•Preprinted
•Colored
•Light
•Heavy
•Custom
Type [x]
Card stock X
Labels
•Paper
X
Envelope X X X X
Paper and specialty media guide 60
Printing
Printing forms
Use Forms and Favorites to quickly and easily access frequently used forms or other information that is regularly printed.
Before you can use this application, first set it up on the printer. For more information, see “Setting up Forms and
Favorites” on page 20.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
Forms and Favorites > select the form from the list > enter the number of copies > adjust other settings
2Apply the changes.
Printing a document
Printing a document
1From the printer control panel, set the paper type and size to match the paper loaded.
2Send the print job:
For Windows users
aWith a document open, click File > Print.
bClick Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
cAdjust the settings, if necessary.
dClick OK > Print.
For Macintosh users
aCustomize the settings in the Page Setup dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Page Setup.
2Choose a paper size or create a custom size to match the paper loaded.
3Click OK.
bCustomize the settings in the Print dialog:
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options pop‑up menus, adjust the settings, if necessary.
Note: To print on a specific paper type, adjust the paper type setting to match the paper loaded, or
select the appropriate tray or feeder.
3Click Print.
Printing in black and white
From the home screen, navigate to:
Printing 61
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Print Mode > Black Only >
Adjusting toner darkness
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness.
3Adjust the setting, and then click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Quality Menu > Toner Darkness
2Adjust the setting, and then touch .
Using Max Speed and Max Yield
Max Speed and Max Yield let you choose between a faster print speed or a higher toner yield. Max Yield is the factory
default setting.
•Max Speed—This lets you print in either black or color depending on what is set in the printer driver. The printer
prints in color unless Black Only is selected in the printer driver.
•Max Yield—This lets you switch from black to color based on the color content found on each page. Frequent color
mode switching can result to slower printing if the content of pages is mixed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu.
3From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
4Click Submit.
Printing 62
Using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Print Settings > Setup Menu
2From the Printer Usage list, select Max Speed or Max Yield.
3Touch Submit.
Printing from a flash drive or mobile device
Printing from a flash drive
Notes:
•Before printing an encrypted PDF file, you will be prompted to type the file password from the printer control
panel.
•You cannot print files for which you do not have printing permissions.
1Insert a flash drive into the USB port.
Notes:
•A flash drive icon appears on the printer home screen when a flash drive is inserted.
•If you insert the flash drive when the printer requires attention, such as when a jam has occurred, then the
printer ignores the flash drive.
•If you insert the flash drive while the printer is processing other print jobs, then Busy appears on the printer
display. After these print jobs are processed, you may need to view the held jobs list to print documents
from the flash drive.
Printing 63
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the USB cable, any wireless network adapter, any connector, the
memory device, or the printer in the areas shown while actively printing, reading, or writing from the memory
device. Loss of data can occur.
2From the printer control panel, touch the document you want to print.
3Touch the arrows to get a preview of the document.
4Use or to specify the number of copies to be printed, and then touch Print.
Notes:
•Do not remove the flash drive from the USB port until the document has finished printing.
•If you leave the flash drive in the printer after leaving the initial USB menu screen, then touch Held Jobs on
the home screen to print files from the flash drive.
Supported flash drives and file types
Notes:
•High‑speed USB flash drives must support the full‑speed standard. Low-speed USB devices are not supported.
•USB flash drives must support the File Allocation Table (FAT) system. Devices formatted with New Technology
File System (NTFS) or any other file system are not supported.
Printing 64
Recommended flash drives File type
•Lexar JumpDrive FireFly (512MB and 1GB)
•SanDisk Cruzer Micro (512MB and 1GB)
•Sony Micro Vault Classic (512MB and 1GB)
Documents:
•.pdf
•.xps
Images:
•.dcx
•.gif
•.jpeg or .jpg
•.bmp
•.pcx
•.tiff or .tif
•.png
•.fls
Printing from a mobile device
To download a compatible mobile printing application, visit www.lexmark.com/mobile.
Note: Mobile printing applications may also be available from your mobile device manufacturer.
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Storing print jobs in the printer
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Security > Confidential Print > select a print job type
Use To
Max Invalid PIN Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Note: When the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN
are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration Hold print jobs in the computer until you enter the PIN from the printer control
panel.
Note: The PIN is set from the computer. It must be four digits, using the
numbers 0–9.
Repeat Job Expiration Print and store print jobs in the printer memory.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
Printing 65
Use To
Verify Job Expiration Print one copy of a print job and hold the remaining copies. It lets you examine
if the first copy is satisfactory or not. The print job is automatically deleted
from the printer memory when all copies are printed.
Reserve Job Expiration Store print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: The print jobs are held until deleted from the Held Jobs menu.
Notes:
•Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
•You can set the printer to store print jobs in the printer memory until you start the print job from the printer
control panel.
•All print jobs that can be initiated by the user at the printer are called held jobs.
2Touch .
Printing confidential and other held jobs
Note: Confidential and Verify print jobs are automatically deleted from memory after printing. Repeat and Reserve
jobs are held in the printer until you delete them.
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Print and Hold.
4Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
5Click OK or Print.
6From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
If necessary, click the disclosure triangle to see more options.
2From the print options or Copies & Pages pop‑up menu, choose Job Routing.
3Select the print job type (Confidential, Repeat, Reserve, or Verify), and then assign a user name. For a confidential
print job, also enter a four‑digit PIN.
4Click OK or Print.
Printing 66
5From the printer home screen, release the print job.
•For confidential print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > Confidential Jobs > enter the PIN > Print
•For other print jobs, navigate to:
Held jobs > select your user name > select the print job > specify the number of copies > Print
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Configuration > Other Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds that number, all of the jobs for that user
are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within that time, all of
the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Printing information pages
Printing a font sample list
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Fonts
2Touch PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
Printing a directory list
A directory list shows the resources stored in a flash memory or in the printer hard disk.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Reports > Print Directory
Printing 67
Canceling a print job
Canceling a print job from the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs, or press on the keypad.
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch .
3Press on the keypad to return to the home screen.
Canceling a print job from the computer
For Windows users
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
For Macintosh users
1From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer.
2From the print queue, select the print job you want to cancel, and then delete it.
Printing 68
Copying
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Making copies
Making a quick copy
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure the size of the original document and the size of the copy paper are
the same.
3From the printer control panel, press .
Copying using the ADF
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 69
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2Adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
Copying using the scanner glass
1Place an original document facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > specify the copy settings > Copy It
If you have more pages to scan, then place the next document on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the next
page.
3Touch Finish the Job.
Copying photos
1Place a photo facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content > Photo >
3From the Content Source menu, select the appropriate setting that best matches the original photo.
4Touch > Copy It
Note: If you have more photos to copy, then place the next photo on the scanner glass, and then touch Scan the
next page.
5Touch Finish the Job.
Copying on specialty media
Copying on transparencies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
Copying 70
3Navigate to:
Copy to > select the tray that contains transparencies > Copy It
If there are no trays that support transparencies, then navigate to:
Manual Feeder > select the size of the transparencies > Transparency
4Load transparencies into the multipurpose feeder, and then touch Copy It.
Copying on letterhead
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
3Touch Copy to > Manual Feeder.
4Place the letterhead faceup, top edge first into the multipurpose feeder.
5Select the size of the letterhead, and then touch Letterhead > Copy It.
Creating a copy shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Copy.
2Adjust the copy settings, and then touch Save As Shortcut.
Note: If you change the settings after the copy shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch .
4Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the Copy Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when copying another document using the same settings.
Customizing copy settings
Copying to a different size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Copying 71
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
4Navigate to:
Copy to > select a new size for the copy > Copy It
Note: If the selected paper size is different from the “Copy from” size, then the printer scales the size
automatically.
Making copies using paper from a selected tray
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > select the size of the original document
4Touch Copy to, and then select the tray that contains the paper type you want to use.
5Touch Copy It.
Copying different paper sizes
Use the ADF to copy original documents with different paper sizes. Depending on the paper sizes loaded and the “Copy
to” and “Copy from” settings, each copy is either printed on mixed paper sizes (Example 1) or scaled to fit a single paper
size (Example 2).
Example 1: Copying on mixed paper sizes
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Copying 72
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Auto Size Match > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned. Copies are printed on mixed paper sizes
corresponding to the paper sizes of the original document.
Example 2: Copying on a single paper size
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Copy from > Mixed Sizes > Copy to > Letter > Copy It
The scanner identifies the different paper sizes as they are scanned, and then scales the mixed paper sizes to fit on
the paper size selected.
Copying on both sides of the paper (duplexing)
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Sides (Duplex) > select the preferred duplexing method
Note: For the preferred duplexing method, the first number represents sides of the original documents while
the second number represents sides of the copy. For example, select “2 sided to 2 sided” if you have two-sided
original documents and you want two‑sided copies.
4Touch > Copy It.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Copies can be scaled from 25% to 400% of the original document size.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Copying 73
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Copy.
4From the Scale area, touch or to enlarge or reduce your copies.
Notes:
•The factory default setting for Scale is Auto.
•If you leave Scale set to Auto, then the content of your original document will be scaled to fit the size of the
paper onto which you are copying.
•Touching Copy to or Copy from after setting Scale manually changes the scale value back to Auto.
5Touch Copy It.
Adjusting copy quality
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Content
4Touch the button that best represents the content type of the document you are copying.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and
animations.
5Touch .
6Touch the button that best represents the content source of the document you are copying.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from a film.
Copying 74
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
7Touch > Copy It.
Collating copies
If you print multiple copies of a document, then you can choose to print the copies as a set (collated) or to print the
copies as groups of pages (not collated).
Collated Not collated
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > enter the number of copies > Collate > select the preferred order of pages > > Copy It
Placing separator sheets between copies
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Separator Sheets
Note: Set Collate to “1,2,3 ‑ 1,2,3” to place separator sheets between copies. If Collate is set to “1,1,1 ‑ 2,2,2,”
then the separator sheets are added to the end of the copy job. For more information, see “Collating copies” on
page 75.
4Select one of the following:
•Between Copies
•Between Jobs
Copying 75
•Between Pages
•Off
5Touch > Copy It.
Copying multiple pages onto a single sheet
In order to save paper, you can copy either two or four consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto a single
sheet of paper.
Notes:
•Make sure to set the paper size to letter, legal, A4, or JIS B5.
•Make sure to set the copy size to 100%.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Paper Saver > select the output you want > > Copy It
Note: If Paper Saver is set to Off, then the Print Page Borders option is unavailable.
Placing information on copies
Placing a header or footer on pages
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Header/Footer
4Select Header or Footer, and then touch .
5Select where you want to insert the header or footer, then select a text option, and then touch .
Copying 76
6Select where you want to print the header or footer, and then touch .
7From the Header/Footer menu, touch > Copy It.
Placing an overlay message on each page
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Copy > Overlay > select an overlay message > .
Note: The message choices are Urgent, Confidential, Copy, Custom, and Draft.
4Touch Copy It.
Canceling a copy job
Canceling a copy job while the original document is in the ADF
When the ADF begins processing a document, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel.
Canceling a copy job while copying pages using the scanner glass
From the home screen, touch Cancel Job.
Canceling appears on the display. When the job is canceled, the Copy screen appears.
Canceling a copy job while pages are being printed
1From the printer control panel, press .
2Touch the job you want to cancel, and then touch .
3Press to return to the home screen.
Copying 77
Understanding the copy options
Copy from
This option lets you select the paper size of the original document.
•Touch the paper size that matches the original document.
•To copy an original document that contains mixed paper sizes with the same width, touch Mixed Sizes.
Copy to
This option lets you select the size and type of paper on which your copies will be printed.
•Touch the paper size and type that matches the paper loaded.
•If the settings for “Copy from” and “Copy to” are different, then the printer automatically adjusts the Scale setting
to accommodate the difference.
•If the type or size of paper you want to use is not loaded in one of the trays, then touch Manual Feeder, and manually
load the paper in the manual feeder or multipurpose feeder.
•When “Copy to” is set to Auto Size Match, each copy matches the paper size of the original document. If a matching
paper size is not in one of the trays, then Paper size not found appears and prompts to load a paper in a
tray, manual feeder, or multipurpose feeder.
Scale
This option lets you scale the document from 25% to 400% of the original document size. You can also set automatic
scaling.
•When copying to a different paper size, such as from legal‑size to letter‑size paper, set the “Copy from” and “Copy
to” paper sizes automatically to scale the scan image to fit the size of the paper onto which you are copying.
•To decrease or increase the value by 1%, touch or on the printer control panel. To make a continuous
decrease or increase in value, hold the button for two seconds or more.
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the copies are in relation to the original document.
Sides (Duplex)
This option lets you make one- or two-sided copies from one- or two-sided original documents.
Collate
This option keeps the pages of a print job stacked in sequence when printing multiple copies of the document.
Copies
This option lets you set the number of copies to be printed.
Copying 78
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Advanced Duplex
This option lets you specify the document orientation, whether documents are one-sided or two-sided, and how
documents are bound.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Margin Shift
This option lets you increase or reduce the size of the margin of a page by shifting the scanned image. Touch or
to set the margin you want. If the additional margin is too large, then the copy will be cropped.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or marks around the edges of a document. You can choose to remove an equal
area around all four sides of the paper, or pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the area
selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Copying 79
Overlay
This option lets you create a watermark (or message) that overlays the content of your copy. You can choose from
Confidential, Copy, Draft, Urgent, and Custom. You can type a custom message in the ”Enter the Custom Text Overlay
and press OK” field. The message will appear, faintly, in large print across each page.
Cover Page Setup
This option lets you set up the cover page of copies and booklets.
Separator Sheets
This option lets you place a blank sheet of paper between copies, prints, pages, print jobs or copy jobs. The separator
sheets can be drawn from a tray that contains a type or color of paper that is different from the paper your copies are
printed on.
Header/Footer
This option lets you insert a header or footer and specify its location on a page.
Select one of the following:
•Bates number
•Custom text
•Date/Time
•Page number
Paper Saver
This option lets you print two or more pages of an original document on the same page. Paper Saver is also called N-
up printing where N stands for the number of pages. For example, 2-up would print two pages of your document on a
single page, and 4-up would print four pages of your document on a single page.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust the Auto Center, Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you copy the document.
Create Booklet
This option lets you create a sequence of printed and collated pages that, when folded, forms a booklet half the page
size of the original document and with all the pages in order. You can choose between one‑sided and two‑sided.
Note: This option appears only when a printer hard disk is installed.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Copying 80
Adjust ADF Skew
This option lets you straighten scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Copying 81
E-mailing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
You can use the printer to e‑mail scanned documents to one or more recipients. There are three ways to send an e‑mail
from the printer. You can type the e‑mail address, use a shortcut number, or use the address book.
Setting up the printer to e-mail
Setting up the e-mail function
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > E-mail/FTP Settings > E-mail Settings.
3Enter the appropriate information, and then click Submit.
Creating an e-mail shortcut
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
E-mailing 82
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings column, click Manage Shortcuts > E-mail Shortcut Setup.
4Type a unique name for the e‑mail recipient, and then type the e‑mail address. If you are entering multiple addresses,
then separate each address with a comma.
5Click Add.
Creating an e-mail shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the recipient’s e‑mail address >
Note: To create a group of recipients, touch , and then type the next recipient’s e-mail address.
2Touch Subject > type the e‑mail subject > .
3Touch Message > type your message > .
4Adjust the e‑mail settings.
Note: If you change the settings after the e‑mail shortcut has been created, then the settings are not saved.
5Touch Save As Shortcut.
6Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch .
7Verify that the shortcut name is correct, and then touch OK.
If the shortcut name is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Notes:
•The shortcut name appears in the E-mail Shortcuts icon on the printer home screen.
•You can use the shortcut when e‑mailing another document using the same settings.
E-mailing a document
Sending an e-mail using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
E-mailing 83
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Note: To avoid a cropped image, make sure that the size of the original document and the copy paper size are
the same.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s)
4Type the e‑mail address, or press # and then enter the shortcut number.
To enter additional recipients, touch , and then enter the e‑mail address or shortcut number that you want to
add.
Note: You can also enter an e‑mail address using the address book.
5Touch > E‑mail It.
Sending an e‑mail using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3Press #, then enter the shortcut number using the keypad, and then touch .
To enter additional recipients, touch , and then enter the e‑mail address or shortcut number that you want to
add.
4Touch > E‑mail It.
Sending an e‑mail using the address book
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > > type the name of the recipient >
E-mailing 84
4Touch the name of the recipient.
To search for additional recipients, touch New Search, and then type the name of the next recipient.
5Touch > E‑mail It.
Customizing e-mail settings
Adding e-mail subject and message information
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address >
4Touch Subject > type the e‑mail subject > .
5Touch Message > type your message > .
Changing the output file type
1Load an original document into the ADF tray or on the scanner glass.
2From the home screen, navigate to:
E-mail > Recipient(s) > type the e‑mail address > > Send as
3Select the file type you want to send.
4Touch > Send It.
Canceling an e-mail
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job while Scanning appears, or while Scan the Next Page /
Finish the Job appears.
E-mailing 85
Understanding the e-mail options
Recipient(s)
This option lets you enter the recipient of your e-mail. You may enter multiple e‑mail addresses.
Subject
This option lets you type a subject line for your e-mail.
Message
This option lets you type a message that will be sent with your scanned attachment.
File Name
This option lets you customize the attachment file name.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to e‑mail. When Original Size is set to Mixed
Sizes, you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark your scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your e-mail. Increasing the image resolution increases the e-mail file
size and the time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
E-mailing 86
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use this to create a single file with multiple pages. This can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use this to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu of the
Embedded Web Server, then TIFF saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use this to create and attach a separate file for each page of your original document.
•XPS—Use this to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the e-mail.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the e-mail. When the first page is scanned,
the scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
E-mailing 87
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, Sharpness, and Temperature settings before you e‑mail the
document.
Adjust ADF Skew
This option lets you straighten scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
E-mailing 88
Faxing
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
Setting up the printer to fax
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not use the fax feature during a lightning storm. Do not set up this product or
make any electrical or cabling connections, such as the fax feature, power cord, or telephone, during a lightning
storm.
Notes:
•The following connection methods are applicable only in some countries or regions.
•During the initial printer setup, clear the fax function check box and any other function you plan to set up later,
and then touch Continue.
•The indicator light may blink red if the fax function is enabled and not fully set up.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the cables or the printer in the area shown while actively sending or
receiving a fax.
Faxing 89
Initial fax setup
Many countries and regions require outgoing faxes to contain the following information in a margin at the top or bottom
of each transmitted page, or on the first page of the transmission: fax name (identification of the business, other entity,
or individual sending the message) and fax number (telephone number of the sending fax machine, business, other
entity, or individual). For more information, see “Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment” on
page 322.
To enter your fax setup information, use the printer control panel, or use your browser to access the Embedded Web
Server and then enter the Settings menu.
Note: If you do not have a TCP/IP environment, then you must use the printer control panel to enter your fax setup
information.
Using the printer control panel for fax setup
When the printer is turned on for the first time, a series of start‑up screens appear. If the printer has fax capabilities,
then the Fax Name and Fax Number screens appear.
1When the Fax Name screen appears, do the following:
aEnter the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
bEnter the fax name, and then touch Submit.
2When the Fax Number screen appears, enter the fax number, and then touch Submit.
Using the Embedded Web Server for fax setup
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
Faxing 90
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Choosing a fax connection
Scenario 1: Standard telephone line
Setup 1: Printer is connected to a dedicated fax line
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
•You can set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On) or manually (Auto Answer Off).
•If you want to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), then set the printer to pick up on any number of rings
that you want.
Faxing 91
Setup 2: Printer is sharing the line with an answering machine
Connected to the same telephone wall jack
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the answering machine to the port of the printer.
Faxing 92
Connected to different wall jacks
PHONE
LINE
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
Tips for this setup:
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes automatically
(Auto Answer On).
•Set the printer to pick up calls two rings after the answering machine. For example, if the answering machine picks
up calls after four rings, then set the printer to pick up after six rings. This way, the answering machine picks up
calls first and your voice calls are received. If the call is a fax, then the printer detects the fax signal on the line and
takes over the call.
•If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service provided by your telephone company, then make sure that you set the
correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you have set it to receive
faxes automatically.
Faxing 93
Setup 3: Printer is sharing the line with a telephone subscribed to voice mail service
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog wall jack.
3Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Tips for this setup:
•This setup works best if you subscribe to a distinctive ring service. If you have distinctive ring service, then make
sure that you set the correct ring pattern for the printer. Otherwise, the printer does not receive faxes even if you
have set it to receive faxes automatically.
•If you have only one telephone number on your line, then you need to set the printer to receive faxes manually
(Auto Answer Off).
When you answer the telephone and you hear fax tones, press *9* or the manual answer code on the telephone
to receive the fax.
•You can also set the printer to receive faxes automatically (Auto Answer On), but you need to turn off the voice
mail service when you are expecting a fax. This setting works best if you are using voice mail more often than fax.
Faxing 94
Scenario 2: Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
A Digital Subscriber Line splits your regular telephone line into two channels: voice and Internet. Telephone and fax
signals travel through the voice channel, and Internet signals pass through the other channel. This way, you can use
the same line for analog voice calls (including faxes) and digital Internet access.
To minimize interference between the two channels and ensure a quality connection, you need to install a DSL filter
for the analog devices (fax machine, telephone, answering machine) in your network. Interference causes noise and
static on the telephone, failed and poor quality faxes for the printer, and slow Internet connection on your computer.
Note: Contact your DSL provider to obtain a DSL filter.
To install a filter for the printer:
1Connect the line port of the DSL filter to the wall jack.
2Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer. Connect the other
end to the phone port on the DSL filter.
Faxing 95
3To connect a telephone to the printer, remove any installed adapter plug from the port of the printer, and then
connect the telephone to the port.
Scenario 3: VoIP telephone service
To connect:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the VoIP adapter.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
3Connect the telephone to the port of the printer.
Faxing 96
Tips for this setup:
•To make sure that the phone port on the VoIP adapter is active, plug an analog telephone into the phone port, and
then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•If you need two phone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the printer
into the second phone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the port labeled Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
Note: Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct
splitter, plug an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Scenario 4: Digital telephone service through a cable provider
Setup 1: Printer is connected directly to a cable modem
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the port labeled Phone Line 1 or Phone Port on the cable modem.
Note: The port labeled Phone Line 2 or Fax Port is not always active. VoIP providers may charge additional cost
for activation of the second phone port.
Faxing 97
3Connect your analog telephone phone to the port of the printer.
Notes:
•To make sure that the telephone port on the cable modem is active, plug an analog telephone into the
telephone port, and then listen for a dial tone. If you hear a dial tone, then the port is active.
•If you need two telephone ports for your devices, but do not want to pay additional cost, then do not plug the
printer into the second telephone port. You can use a phone splitter. Plug the phone splitter into the Phone Line
1 or Phone Port, and then plug the printer and telephone into the splitter.
•Make sure you use a phone splitter, not a line splitter. To make sure that you are using the correct splitter, plug
an analog telephone into the splitter and then listen for a dial tone.
Setup 2: Printer is connected to a wall jack; cable modem is installed elsewhere in the facility
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with your printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Connect your analog telephone to the port of the printer.
Faxing 98
Scenario 5: Countries or regions with different telephone wall jacks and plugs
Some countries or regions may have different types of telephone wall jack connectors than those that came with the
printer. The standard wall jack adopted by most countries or regions is RJ-11. Your printer comes with the RJ-11 jack
and a telephone cable with the RJ-11 plug.
If the wall jack or equipment in your facility is not compatible with this type of connection, then you need to use a
telephone adapter. An adapter for your country or region may not come with your printer, and you may need to
purchase it separately.
There may be an adapter plug installed in the port of the printer. If you are using a telephone adapter or a facility
that has a cascaded or serial wiring scheme, then do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer.
Part name Part number
Lexmark adapter plug 40X8519
Faxing 99
Connecting the printer to a non‑RJ‑11 wall jack
LINE
EXT
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to the wall jack.
3If you want to connect another device (telephone or answering machine) to the same wall jack, and if the device
has a non‑RJ‑11 connector, then connect it directly to the telephone adapter.
Notes:
•The port of the printer may have an adapter plug for use with the adapter. Do not remove the plug from
the port of the printer.
•In some countries or regions, the printer may not come with a telephone adapter or an adapter plug.
Faxing 100
Connecting the printer to a wall jack in Germany
The German wall jack has two kinds of ports. The N ports are for fax machines, modems, and answering machines. The
F port is for telephones.
NFN
Connect the printer to any of the N ports.
PHONE
LINE
NFN
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came the printer to the port of the printer.
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to the RJ‑11 adapter, and then connect the adapter to an N port.
Faxing 101
3If you want to connect a telephone and answering machine to the same wall jack, then connect the devices as
shown.
Note: Do not remove the adapter plug from the port of the printer if you are connecting to a serial or cascaded
telephone system.
Connecting to a distinctive ring service
A distinctive ring service may be available from your telephone company. This service lets you have multiple telephone
numbers on one telephone line, with each telephone number having a different ring pattern. This may be useful for
distinguishing between fax and voice calls. If you subscribe to a distinctive ring service, then follow these steps to
connect the equipment:
1Connect one end of the telephone cable that came with the printer to the printer LINE port .
2Connect the other end of the telephone cable to an active analog telephone wall jack.
3Change the distinctive rings setting to match the setting you want for the printer to answer.
Note: The factory default setting for distinctive rings is On. This sets the printer to answer single, double, and
triple ring patterns.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Answer On
bSelect the pattern setting you want to change, and then touch .
Setting the outgoing fax name and number
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
3In the Fax Name field, type the name to be printed on all outgoing faxes.
Faxing 102
4In the Fax Number field, enter the printer fax number.
5Click Submit.
Setting the date and time
You can set the date and time so that they are printed on every fax you send.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3In the Manually Set Date & Time field, enter the current date and time.
4Click Submit.
Note: It is recommended to use the network time.
Configuring the printer to observe daylight saving time
The printer can be set to automatically adjust for daylight saving time:
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Security > Set Date and Time.
3Select the Automatically Observe DST check box, and then enter the DST start and end dates in the Custom Time
Zone Setup section.
4Click Submit.
Sending a fax
Sending a fax using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
Faxing 103
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax.
4From the printer control panel keypad, enter the fax number or the shortcut number.
Note: To add recipients, touch , and then enter the recipient's telephone number or shortcut number, or
search the address book.
5Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the computer
For Windows users
1With a document open, click File > Print.
2Select the printer, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
3Click Fax > Enable fax, and then enter the recipient fax number or numbers.
4If necessary, configure other fax settings.
5Apply the changes, and then send the fax job.
Notes:
•The fax option is available only with the PostScript driver or the Universal Fax Driver. For more information, go
to http://support.lexmark.com.
•To use the fax option with the PostScript driver, configure and enable it in the Configuration tab.
For Macintosh users
1With a document open, choose File > Print.
2Select the printer.
3Enter the recipient fax number, and then configure other fax settings, if necessary.
4Send the fax job.
Sending a fax using a shortcut number
Fax shortcuts are like the speed dial numbers on a telephone or a fax machine. A shortcut number (1–999) can contain
a single recipient or multiple recipients.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Faxing 104
3From the printer control panel, press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
4Touch Fax It.
Sending a fax using the address book
The address book feature lets you search for bookmarks and network directory servers.
Note: If the address book feature is not enabled, then contact your system support person.
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > > type the name of the recipient >
Note: You can only search for one name at a time.
4Touch the name of the recipient, and then touch Fax It.
Sending a fax at a scheduled time
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
Fax > enter the fax number > Delayed Send
Note: If Fax Mode is set to Fax Server, then the Delayed Send button will not appear. Faxes waiting for
transmission are listed in the fax queue.
4Specify the time the fax will be transmitted, and then touch .
The time is increased or decreased in 30‑minute increments.
5Touch Fax It.
Note: The document is scanned and then faxed at the scheduled time.
Faxing 105
Creating shortcuts
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
Assign a shortcut number to a single fax number or a group of fax numbers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Manage Shortcuts > Fax Shortcut Setup.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
3Type a name for the shortcut, and then enter the fax number.
Notes:
•To create a multiple‑number shortcut, enter the fax numbers for the group.
•Separate each fax number in the group with a semicolon (;).
4Assign a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating a fax destination shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
To create a group of fax numbers, touch , and then enter the other fax number.
2Touch .
3Type a unique name for the shortcut, and then touch .
4Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information.
Customizing fax settings
Changing the fax resolution
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Faxing 106
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4From the Resolution area, touch or to change to the resolution you want.
Note: Settings range from Standard (fastest speed) to Ultra Fine (best quality at a reduced speed).
5Touch Fax It.
Making a fax lighter or darker
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, touch Fax, and then enter the fax number.
4From the Darkness area, touch or to adjust the darkness setting of the fax.
5Touch Fax It.
Viewing a fax log
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Reports.
3Click Fax Job Log or Fax Call Log.
Blocking junk faxes
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
Faxing 107
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Block No Name Fax.
Notes:
•This option blocks all incoming faxes that have a private caller ID or have no fax name.
•In the Banned Fax List field, enter the phone numbers or type the fax names of specific fax callers you want
to block.
Canceling an outgoing fax
Canceling a fax while the original documents are still scanning
•When using the ADF, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears.
•When using the scanner glass, touch Cancel Job on the printer control panel while Scanning appears or while
Scan the Next Page and Finish the Job appear.
Canceling a fax after the original documents have been scanned to memory
1On the home screen, touch Cancel Jobs.
The Cancel Jobs screen appears.
2Touch the job or jobs you want to cancel.
Only three jobs appear on the screen; touch the down arrow until the job you want appears, and then touch the
job you want to cancel.
3Touch Delete Selected Jobs.
The Deleting Selected Jobs screen appears, the selected jobs are deleted, and then the home screen appears.
Holding and forwarding faxes
Holding faxes
This option lets you hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held faxes can be released manually or
at a scheduled day or time.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup > Holding Faxes.
Faxing 108
3From the Held Fax Mode menu, select one of the following:
•Off
•Always On
•Manual
•Scheduled
4If you selected Scheduled, then continue with the following steps:
aClick Fax Holding Schedule.
bFrom the Action menu, select Hold faxes.
cFrom the Time menu, select the time you want the held faxes released.
dFrom the Day(s) menu, select the day you want the held faxes released.
5Click Add.
Forwarding a fax
This option lets you print and forward received faxes to a fax number, e‑mail address, FTP site, or LDSS.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Fax Settings.
3From the Fax Forwarding menu, select Print, Print and Forward, or Forward.
4From the “Forward to” menu, select Fax, E‑mail, FTP, LDSS, or eSF.
5In the “Forward to Shortcut” field, enter the shortcut number where you want the fax forwarded.
Note: The shortcut number must be valid for the setting selected in the “Forward to” menu.
6Click Submit.
Understanding the fax options
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the faxes are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the quality of the fax output. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Faxing 109
Select one of the following:
•Standard—Use this when faxing most documents.
•Fine 200 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with small prints.
•Super fine 300 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with fine details.
•Ultra fine 600 dpi—Use this when faxing documents with pictures or photos.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Content
This option lets you specify the content type and source of the original document.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on one side or on both sides of the page (duplex).
This also identifies what needs to be scanned for inclusion in the fax.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Faxing 110
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the fax. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a working printer hard disk is installed.
Delayed Send
This option lets you send a fax at a later time or date.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you change or adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you fax the document.
Adjust ADF Skew
This option lets you straighten scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Faxing 111
Scanning
Using Scan to Network
Scan to Network lets you scan your documents to network destinations specified by your system support person. After
the destinations (shared network folders) have been established on the network, the setup process for the application
involves installing and configuring the application on the appropriate printer using its Embedded Web Server. For more
information, see “Setting up Scan to Network” on page 22.
Scanning to an FTP address
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents including
two-sided pages.
Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, book pages,
small items (such as postcards or photos), transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server. Only one FTP address may be
sent to the server at a time.
When an FTP destination has been configured by your system support person, the name of the destination becomes
available as a shortcut number, or it is listed as a profile under the Held Jobs icon. An FTP destination could also be
another PostScript printer.
Creating shortcuts
Instead of entering the entire FTP site address on the printer control panel each time you want to send a document to
an FTP server, you can create a permanent FTP destination and assign a shortcut number. There are two methods for
creating shortcut numbers: using the Embedded Web Server or using the printer control panel.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Scanning 112
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Navigate to:
Settings > Other Settings area > Manage Shortcuts > FTP Shortcut Setup
3Enter the appropriate information.
Note: A password may be required. If you do not have an ID and password, then contact your system support
person.
4Enter a shortcut number.
Note: If you enter a number that is already in use, then you are prompted to select another number.
5Click Add.
Creating an FTP shortcut using the printer control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address > > > type a name for the shortcut >
2Verify that the shortcut name and number are correct, and then touch OK.
If the name or number is incorrect, then touch Cancel, and then reenter the information. If you enter a number
that is already in use, then you will be prompted to select another number.
Scanning to an FTP address
Scanning to an FTP address using the printer control panel
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the home screen, navigate to:
FTP > FTP Address > type the FTP address > > Scan It
Scanning to an FTP address using a shortcut number
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Scanning 113
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
3From the printer control panel, press # on the keypad, and then enter the FTP shortcut number.
4Touch Scan It.
Scanning to a computer or flash drive
Automatic document feeder (ADF) Scanner glass
Use the ADF for multiple‑page documents. Use the scanner glass for single-page documents, small items (such as postcards
or photos), transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings).
The scanner lets you scan documents directly to a computer or a flash drive. The computer does not have to be directly
connected to the printer for you to receive images when scanning to a computer. You can scan the document back to
the computer over the network by creating a scan profile on the computer and then downloading the profile to the
printer.
Scanning to a computer using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Scan Profile > Create Scan Profile.
3Select your scan settings, and then click Next.
4Select a location on your computer where you want to save the scan image.
Scanning 114
5Type a scan name, and then a user name.
Note: The scan name is the name that appears in the Scan Profile list on the display.
6Click Submit.
Note: Clicking Submit automatically assigns a shortcut number. You can use this shortcut number when you are
ready to scan your documents.
7Review the instructions on the Scan Profile screen.
aLoad an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as
magazine clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
bIf you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
cDo either of the following:
•Press #, and then enter the shortcut number using the keypad.
•From the home screen, navigate to:
Held Jobs > Profiles > select your shortcut on the list
Note: The scanner scans and sends the document to the directory you specified.
8View the file from the computer.
Note: The output file is saved in the location or launched in the program you specified.
Setting up Scan to Computer
Notes:
•This feature is supported only in Windows Vista or later.
•Make sure your computer and printer are connected to the same network.
1Open the printers folder, and then select your printer.
Note: If your printer is not in the list, then add your printer.
2Open the printer properties, and then adjust the settings as necessary.
3From the control panel, touch Scan to Computer > select the appropriate scan setting > Send It.
Scanning to a flash drive
1Load an original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray or facedown on the scanner glass.
Notes:
•Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo paper, or thin media (such as magazine
clippings) into the ADF tray. Place these items on the scanner glass.
•The ADF indicator light comes on when the paper is loaded properly.
2If you are loading a document into the ADF tray, then adjust the paper guides.
Scanning 115
3Insert the flash drive into the USB port on the front of the printer.
Note: The USB Drive home screen appears.
4Select the destination folder, and then touch Scan to USB drive.
Note: The printer goes back to the home screen after 30 seconds of inactivity.
5Adjust the scan settings, and then touch Scan It.
Understanding the scan options
FTP Address
This option lets you enter the IP address for the FTP destination.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
File Name
This option lets you type a file name for the scan image.
Save As Shortcut
This option lets you save the current settings as a shortcut by assigning a shortcut name.
Note: Selecting this option automatically assigns the next available shortcut number.
Original Size
This option lets you set the paper size of the documents you are going to scan. When Original Size is set to Mixed Sizes,
you can scan an original document that contains mixed paper sizes (letter‑ and legal‑size pages).
Darkness
This option lets you adjust how light or dark the scanned documents are in relation to the original document.
Resolution
This option lets you adjust the output quality of your file. Increasing the image resolution increases the file size and the
time needed to scan your original document. Decreasing the image resolution reduces the file size.
Color
This option lets you set the output to either color or monochrome for the scanned image.
Scanning 116
Send As
This option lets you set the output type for the scan image.
Select one of the following:
•PDF—Use to create a single file with multiple pages. The PDF can be sent as a secured or compressed file.
•TIFF—Use to create multiple files or a single file. If Multi-page TIFF is turned off in the Settings menu, then TIFF
saves one page in each file. The file size is usually larger than an equivalent JPEG.
•JPEG—Use to create and attach a separate file for each page of the original document.
•XPS—Use to create a single XPS file with multiple pages.
Content
This option lets you set the original document type and source.
Select from the following content types:
•Graphics—The original document is mostly business‑type graphics, such as pie charts, bar charts, and animations.
•Photo—The original document is mostly a photo or an image.
•Text—The content of the original document is mostly text or line art.
•Text/Photo—The original document is a mixture of text, graphics, and photos.
Select from the following content sources:
•Black/White Laser—The original document was printed using a mono laser printer.
•Color Laser—The original document was printed using a color laser printer.
•Inkjet—The original document was printed using an inkjet printer.
•Magazine—The original document is from a magazine.
•Newspaper—The original document is from a newspaper.
•Other—The original document was printed using an alternate or unknown printer.
•Photo/Film—The original document is a photo from film.
•Press—The original document was printed using a printing press.
Page Setup
This option lets you change the following settings:
•Sides (Duplex)—This specifies if the original document is printed on only one side or on both sides of the paper.
•Orientation—This specifies the orientation of the original document, and then changes the Sides (Duplex) and
Binding settings to match the orientation.
•Binding—This specifies if the original document is bound on the long‑edge or short‑edge side.
Transmission Log
This option lets you print the transmission log or transmission error log.
Scanning 117
Scan Preview
This option lets you view the first page of the image before it is included in the file. When the first page is scanned, the
scanning is paused and a preview image appears.
Note: This option appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Edge Erase
This option lets you remove smudges or any mark around the edges of a document. You can remove an equal area
around all four sides of the paper, or you can pick a particular edge. Edge Erase also removes whatever is within the
area selected, leaving nothing on that portion of the scan.
Advanced Imaging
This option lets you adjust the Background Removal, Color Balance, Color Dropout, Contrast, JPEG Quality, Mirror Image,
Negative Image, Scan Edge to Edge, Shadow Detail, and Sharpness settings before you scan the document.
Custom Job
This option lets you combine multiple scan jobs into a single job and appears only when a working printer hard disk is
installed.
Adjust ADF Skew
This option lets you straighten scanned images that are slightly skewed when received from the ADF tray.
Scanning 118
Understanding printer menus
Menus list
Supplies Menu Paper Menu Reports Network/Ports Security
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta
Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Waste Toner
Bottle
Imaging Kit
Maintenance Kit
Default Source
Paper Size/Type
Substitute Size
Paper Texture
Paper Weight
Paper Loading
Custom Types
Custom Names
Custom Scan
Sizes
Universal Setup
Menu Settings Page
Device Statistics
Network Setup Page
Network [x] Setup
Page
Shortcut List
Fax Job Log
Fax Call Log
Copy Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
Fax Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Profiles List
Print Fonts
Print Directory
Print Demo
Asset Report
Event Log Summary
Active NIC
Standard
Network1
Standard USB
SMTP Setup
Miscellaneous Security Settings
Confidential Print
Erase Temporary Data Files
Security Audit Log
Set Date and Time
Settings Help Manage Shortcuts Option Card Menu2
General Settings
Copy Settings
Fax Settings
E‑mail Settings
FTP Settings
Flash Drive Menu
OCR Settings
Print Settings
Print All Guides
Copy Guide
E‑mail Guide
Fax Guide
FTP Guide
Color Quality
Print Defects Guide
Information Guide
Supplies Guide
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP Shortcuts
Copy Shortcuts
Profile Shortcuts
[index of each installed DLE]
1 Depending on the printer setup, this menu item appears as Standard Network or Network [x].
2 This menu appears only when one or more DLEs are installed.
Understanding printer menus 119
Supplies menu
Use To
Cyan Cartridge View the status of the toner cartridges, which can be any of
the following:
Early Warning
Low
Invalid
Near End of Life
Replace
Missing
Defective
OK
Unsupported
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Black Cartridge
Waste Toner Bottle
Near Full
Replace
Missing
OK
View the status of the waste toner bottle.
Imaging Kit
OK
Replace Black Imaging Kit
Replace Color Imaging Kit
View the status of the imaging kit.
Maintenance Kit
OK
Replace
View the status of the maintenance kit.
Paper menu
Default Source menu
Use To
Default Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Notes:
•The 650‑sheet duo tray must be installed in order for Multipurpose
Feeder to appear as a menu setting in the Paper menu.
•Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
•Only installed paper sources will appear as menu settings.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one tray
is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Understanding printer menus 120
Paper Size/Type menu
Use To
Tray [x] Size
A4
A5
JIS‑B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Universal
Specify the paper size loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•If two trays contain paper of the same size and type, and the trays have
the same settings, then the trays are automatically linked. When one
tray is empty, the print job continues using the linked tray.
Tray [x] Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Labels
Glossy
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the type of paper loaded in each tray.
Notes:
•Plain Paper is the factory default setting for Tray 1. Custom Type [x] is
the factory default setting for all other trays.
•If available, a user‑defined name appears instead of Custom Type [x].
•Use this menu to configure automatic tray linking.
•Transparency is supported only in the 250‑sheet tray.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 121
Use To
MP Feeder Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the paper size loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Notes:
•Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
•The menu item applies only when the multipurpose feeder (MP Feeder)
is installed.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect paper size. The
paper size value must be set.
MP Feeder Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Envelope
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type loaded in the multipurpose feeder.
Note: Custom Type [x] is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 122
Use To
Manual Paper Size
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Letter
Legal
Executive
Oficio (Mexico)
Folio
Statement
Universal
Specify the size of the paper being manually loaded.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Manual Paper Type
Plain Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Recycled
Glossy
Labels
Bond
Letterhead
Preprinted
Colored Paper
Light Paper
Heavy Paper
Rough/Cotton
Custom Type [x]
Specify the paper type being manually loaded.
Note: Plain Paper is the factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Size
7 3/4 Envelope
9 Envelope
10 Envelope
DL Envelope
C5 Envelope
B5 Envelope
Other Envelope
Specify the envelope size being manually loaded.
Note: 10 Envelope is the U.S. factory default setting. DL Envelope is the
international factory default setting.
Manual Envelope Type
Envelope
Custom Type [x]
Specify the envelope type being manually loaded.
Note: Envelope is the factory default setting.
Note: Only installed trays and feeders are listed in this menu.
Understanding printer menus 123
Substitute Size menu
Use To
Substitute Size
Off
Statement/A5
Letter/A4
All Listed
Substitute a specified paper size if the requested paper size is not available.
Notes:
•All Listed is the factory default setting. All available substitutions are
allowed.
•Off indicates that no size substitutions are allowed.
•Setting a size substitution lets the print job continue without Change
Paper appearing.
Paper Texture menu
Use To
Plain Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Card Stock Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the card stock loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if card stock is supported.
Transparency Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Rough is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 124
Use To
Envelope Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the envelopes loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the light paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Heavy Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the heavy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Rough/Cotton Texture
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the cotton paper loaded.
Custom [x] Texture
Smooth
Normal
Rough
Specify the relative texture of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only if custom type is supported.
Paper Weight menu
Use To
Plain Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the plain paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 125
Use To
Card Stock Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the card stock loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Transparency Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the transparencies loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Recycled Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the recycled paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Glossy Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the glossy paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Labels Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the labels loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Bond Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the bond paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Envelope Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the envelope loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Letterhead Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the letterhead loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Preprinted Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the preprinted paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Colored Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the colored paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Light Weight
Light
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is light.
Understanding printer menus 126
Use To
Heavy Weight
Heavy
Specify that the relative weight of the paper loaded is heavy.
Rough/Cotton Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the rough or cotton paper loaded.
Note: Normal is the factory default setting.
Custom [x] Weight
Light
Normal
Heavy
Specify the relative weight of the custom paper loaded.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting.
•The options appear only when the custom type is supported.
Paper Loading menu
Use To
Recycled Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Recycled as the paper type.
Glossy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Glossy as the paper type.
Bond Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Bond as the paper type.
Letterhead Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Letterhead as the paper type.
Preprinted Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Preprinted as the paper type.
Colored Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Colored as the paper type.
Light Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Light as the paper type.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
•Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Understanding printer menus 127
Use To
Heavy Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Heavy as the paper type.
Custom [x] Loading
Duplex
Off
Determine and set two‑sided printing for all print jobs that specify
Custom [x] as the paper type.
Note: Custom [x] Loading is available only when the custom type is
supported.
Notes:
•Duplex sets the printer default to two‑sided printing for every print job unless one‑sided printing is selected from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
•Off is the factory default setting for all the menus.
Custom Types menu
Use To
Custom Type [x]
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Associate a paper or specialty media type with a factory default Custom Type [x]
name or a user‑defined custom name created in the Embedded Web Server or
MarkVisionTM Professional.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting for Custom Type [x].
•The custom media type must be supported in the selected tray or feeder
in order to print from that source.
Recycled
Paper
Card Stock
Transparency
Glossy
Rough/Cotton
Labels
Envelope
Specify a paper type when Recycled is selected.
Notes:
•Paper is the factory default setting.
•The Recycled paper type must be supported in the selected tray or
feeder in order to print from that source.
Custom Names menu
Use To
Custom Name [x] Specify a custom name for a paper type. This name replaces Custom Type [x] in
the printer menus.
Understanding printer menus 128
Custom Scan Sizes menu
Use To
Custom Scan Size [x]
Scan Size Name
Width
Height
Orientation
2 scans per side
Off
On
Specify a custom scan size name, size, and page orientation.
Notes:
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Width. 216 mm is the
international factory default setting for Width.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting for Height. 356 mm is the
international factory default setting for Height.
•Portrait is the factory default setting for Orientation.
•Off is the factory default setting for 2 scans per side.
Universal Setup menu
Use To
Units of Measure
Inches
Millimeters
Identify the units of measure.
Notes:
•Inches is the U.S. factory default setting.
•Millimeters is the international factory default setting.
Portrait Width
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait width.
Notes:
•If the width exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum width allowed.
•8.5 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
width in 0.01‑inch increments.
•216 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the width in 1‑mm increments.
Portrait Height
3–14.17 inches
76–360 mm
Set the portrait height.
Notes:
•If the height exceeds the maximum, then the printer uses the
maximum height allowed.
•14 inches is the U.S. factory default setting. You can increase the
height in 0.01‑inch increments.
•356 mm is the international factory default setting. You can increase
the height in 1‑mm increments.
Feed Direction
Short Edge
Long Edge
Specify the feed direction if the paper can be loaded in either direction.
Notes:
•Short Edge is the factory default setting.
•Long Edge appears only when the longest edge is shorter than the
maximum width supported in the tray.
Understanding printer menus 129
Reports menu
Reports menu
Use To
Menu Settings Page Print a report on the current printer menu settings. The report also contains
information about the status of the supplies and a list of hardware options that
are successfully installed.
Device Statistics Print a report containing printer statistics, such as supply information and the
number of printed pages.
Stapler Test Print a report that confirms whether the staple finisher is functioning properly.
Note: This menu item appears only when a supported staple finisher is
installed.
Network Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers.
Network [x] Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network settings of the printer.
Note: This menu item appears only in network printers or printers connected
to print servers, and when there is more than one network option installed.
Shortcut List Print a report containing information about configured shortcuts.
Fax Job Log Print a report containing information about the last 200 completed faxes.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Fax Call Log Print a report containing information about the last 100 attempted, received, and
blocked calls.
Notes:
•This menu item appears only when Enable Job Log is set to On in the Fax
Settings menu.
•This menu is supported only in some printer models.
Copy Shortcuts Print a report containing information about copy shortcuts.
E‑mail Shortcuts Print a report containing information about e‑mail shortcuts.
Fax Shortcuts Print a report containing information about fax shortcuts.
FTP Shortcuts Print a report containing information about FTP shortcuts.
Profiles List Print a list of profiles stored in the printer.
Print Fonts Print a report of all the fonts available for the printer language currently set in
the printer.
Understanding printer menus 130
Use To
Print Directory Print a list of all the resources stored in an optional flash memory card or hard
disk.
Notes:
•Job Buffer Size must be set to 100%.
•Make sure that the memory card or hard disk is installed and working
correctly.
Asset Report Print a report containing asset information, including the printer serial number
and model name. The report contains text and UPC bar codes that can be scanned
into an asset database.
Event Log Summary Print a summary of logged events.
Network/Ports
Active NIC menu
Use To
Active NIC
Auto
[list of available network cards]
Allow the printer to connect to a network.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only if an optional network adapter is installed.
Standard Network or Network [x] menu
Note: Only active ports appear in this menu.
Use To
Energy Efficient Ethernet
Enable
Disable
Reduce power consumption when the printer receives no data from the Ethernet
network.
Note: Enable is the factory default setting.
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job requires
it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PCL SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
Understanding printer menus 131
Use To
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job requires it,
regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•If PS SmartSwitch is disabled, then the printer does not examine incoming
data and it uses the default printer language specified in the Setup menu.
NPA Mode
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Network Buffer
Auto
3KB to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the network input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for the Network Buffer, disable or
reduce the size of the parallel, serial, and USB buffers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel.
Job Buffering
Off
On
Auto
Temporarily store print jobs in the printer hard disk before printing. This menu only
appears when a formatted disk is installed.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Standard Network Setup OR
Network [x] Setup
Reports
Network Card
TCP/IP
IPv6
Wireless
AppleTalk
Show and set the printer network settings.
Note: The Wireless menu appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless
network.
Understanding printer menus 132
Reports menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Reports
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Reports
Use To
Print Setup Page Print a report containing information about the network printer settings, such as the TCP/IP address.
Network Card menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > Network Card
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Network Card
Use To
View Card Status
Connected
Disconnected
View the connection status of the wireless network adapter.
View Card Speed View the speed of an active wireless network adapter.
Network Address
UAA
LAA
View the network addresses.
Job Timeout
0, 10–225 seconds
Set the amount of time it takes for a network print job to be canceled.
Notes:
•“90 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•A setting value of 0 disables the timeout.
•If a value between 1 and 9 is selected, then Invalid appears on the
display, and the value is not saved.
Banner Page
Off
On
Allow the printer to print a banner page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
TCP/IP menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > TCP/IP
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > TCP/IP
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers attached to print servers.
Use To
Set Hostname Set the current TCP/IP host name.
Note: This can be changed only from the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding printer menus 133
Use To
IP Address View or change the current TCP/IP address.
Note: Manually setting the IP address sets the Enable DHCP and Enable Auto IP
settings to Off. It also sets Enable BOOTP and Enable RARP to Off on systems that
support BOOTP and RARP.
Netmask View or change the current TCP/IP netmask.
Gateway View or change the current TCP/IP gateway.
Enable DHCP
On
Off
Specify the DHCP address and parameter assignment.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable RARP
On
Off
Specify the RARP address assignment setting.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Enable BOOTP
On
Off
Specify the BOOTP address assignment setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable AutoIP
Yes
No
Specify the Zero Configuration Networking setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable FTP/TFTP
Yes
No
Enable the built-in FTP server, which lets you send files to the printer using File Transfer
Protocol.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable HTTP Server
Yes
No
Enable the built-in Web server (Embedded Web Server). When enabled, the printer
can be monitored and managed remotely using a Web browser.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
WINS Server Address View or change the current WINS server address.
Enable DDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current DDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable mDNS
Yes
No
View or change the current mDNS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
DNS Server Address View or change the current DNS server address.
Backup DNS Server Address View or change the backup DNS server addresses.
Backup DNS Server Address 2
Backup DNS Server Address 3
Enable HTTPS
Yes
No
View or change the current HTTPS setting.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 134
IPv6 menu
To access the menu, navigate to any of the following:
•Network/Ports menu > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup >IPv6
•Network/Ports menu > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > IPv6
Note: This menu is available only in network printers or printers that are attached to print servers.
Use To
Enable IPv6
On
Off
Enable IPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Auto Configuration
On
Off
Specify whether or not the network adapter accepts the automatic IPv6
address configuration entries provided by a router.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Set Hostname Set the host name.
Note: These settings can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address
View Router Address
Enable DHCPv6
On
Off
Enable DHCPv6 in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Wireless menu
Note: This menu is available only in printers connected to a wireless network or printer models that have a wireless
network adapter.
To access the menu, navigate to:
Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > Wireless
Use To
Wi‑Fi Protected Setup
Start Push Button Method
Start PIN Method
Establish a wireless network and enable network security.
Notes:
•Start Push Button Method connects the printer to a wireless
network when buttons on both the printer and the access point
(wireless router) are pressed within a given period of time.
•Start PIN Method connects the printer to a wireless network when
a PIN on the printer is entered into the wireless settings of the
access point.
Enable/Disable WPS Auto‑detection
Enable
Disable
Automatically detect the connection method that an access point with
WPS uses—Start Push Button Method or Start PIN Method.
Note: Disable is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 135
Use To
Network Mode
BSS Type
Infrastructure
Ad hoc
Specify the network mode.
Notes:
•Infrastructure is the factory default setting. This lets the printer
access a network using an access point.
•Ad hoc configures wireless connection directly between the printer
and a computer.
Compatibility
802.11b/g
802.11b/g/n
Specify the wireless standard for the wireless network.
Note: 802.11b/g/n is the factory default setting.
Choose Network Select an available network for the printer to use.
View Signal Quality View the quality of the wireless connection.
View Security Mode View the encryption method for the wireless network.
AppleTalk menu
To access the menu, navigate to either of the following:
•Network/Ports > Standard Network > Standard Network Setup > AppleTalk
•Network/Ports > Network [x] > Network [x] Setup > AppleTalk
Use To
Activate
Yes
No
Enable or disable AppleTalk support.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
View Name Show the assigned AppleTalk name.
Note: The AppleTalk name can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
View Address Show the assigned AppleTalk address.
Note: The AppleTalk address can be changed only from the Embedded Web
Server.
Set Zone
[list of zones available on the network]
Provide a list of AppleTalk zones available on the network.
Note: The default zone for the network is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 136
Standard USB menu
Use To
PCL SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PCL emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PostScript emulation if the PS SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default
printer language specified in the Setup menu if the PS SmartSwitch is set to
Off.
PS SmartSwitch
On
Off
Set the printer to automatically switch to PS emulation when a print job received
through a USB port requires it, regardless of the default printer language.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the printer does not examine incoming data. The printer uses
PCL emulation if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to On. It uses the default printer
language specified in the Setup menu if the PCL SmartSwitch is set to Off.
NPA Mode
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to perform the special processing required for bidirectional
communication following the conventions defined by the NPA protocol.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting. Auto sets the printer to examine data,
determine the format, and then process it appropriately.
•The printer automatically restarts when changing the setting from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
USB Buffer
Disabled
Auto
3K to [maximum size allowed]
Set the size of the USB input buffer.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•Disabled turns off job buffering.
•The USB buffer size value can be changed in 1-KB increments.
•The maximum size allowed depends on the amount of memory in the printer,
the size of the other link buffers, and whether Resource Save is set to On or
Off.
•To increase the maximum size range for USB Buffer, disable or reduce the size
of the parallel, serial, and network buffers.
•The printer automatically restarts when the setting is changed from the printer
control panel. The menu selection is then updated.
Mac Binary PS
On
Off
Auto
Set the printer to process Macintosh binary PostScript print jobs.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•On processes raw binary PostScript print jobs.
•Off filters print jobs using the standard protocol.
Understanding printer menus 137
Use To
ENA Address
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the network address information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Netmask
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the netmask information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
ENA Gateway
yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy
Set the gateway information for an external print server.
Note: This menu is available only when the printer is attached to an external print
server through the USB port.
SMTP Setup menu
Use To
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server gateway and port information.
Note: 25 is the default SMTP gateway port.
Primary SMTP Gateway Port
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Secondary SMTP Gateway Port
SMTP Timeout
5–30
Specify the amount of time in seconds before the server stops trying to
send an e‑mail.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Reply Address Specify a reply address of up to 128 characters in the e-mail sent by the
printer.
Use SSL
Disabled
Negotiate
Required
Set the printer to use SSL for increased security when connecting to the
SMTP server.
Notes:
•Disabled is the factory default setting.
•When the Negotiate setting is used, the SMTP server determines if
SSL will be used.
SMTP Server Authentication
No authentication required
Login/Plain
CRAM‑MD5
Digest‑MD5
NTLM
Kerberos 5
Specify the type of user authentication required for scan to e‑mail
privileges.
Note: “No authentication required” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 138
Use To
Device‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Specify what credentials will be used when communicating to the SMTP
server.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Device‑Initiated E‑mail and
User‑Initiated E‑mail.
•“Device Userid” and “Device password” are used to log in to the
SMTP server when Use Device SMTP Credentials is selected.
User‑Initiated E‑mail
None
Use Device SMTP Credentials
Use Session User ID and Password
Use Session E‑mail address and Password
Prompt user
Device Userid
Device password
Kerberos 5 Realm
NTLM Domain
Security menu
Miscellaneous Security Settings menu
Use To
Login Restrictions
Login failures
Failure time frame
Lockout time
Panel Login Timeout
Remote Login Timeout
Limit the number and time frames of failed login attempts from the printer control
panel before all users are locked out.
Notes:
•“Login failures” specifies the number of failed login attempts before users are
locked out. Settings range from 1 to 10 attempts. “3 attempts” is the factory
default setting.
•“Failure time frame” specifies the time frame during which failed login
attempts can be made before users are locked out. Settings range from 1 to 60
minutes. “5 minutes” is the factory default setting.
•“Lockout time” specifies how long users are locked out after exceeding the
login failures limit. Settings range from 1 to 60 minutes. “5 minutes” is the
factory default setting. 1 indicates that the printer does not impose a lockout
time.
•Panel Login Timeout specifies how long the printer remains idle on the home
screen before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 900
seconds. “30 seconds” is the factory default setting.
•Remote Login Timeout specifies how long a remote interface remains idle
before automatically logging off the user. Settings range from 1 to 120
minutes. “10 minutes” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 139
Use To
Security Reset Jumper
No Effect
Access controls=“No Security”
Reset factory security defaults
Adjust the security settings.
Notes:
•No Effect means the reset has no effect on the printer security configuration.
•Access controls=’No Security’ retains all the security information that the user
has defined. No Security is the factory default setting.
•“Reset factory security defaults” deletes all security information that the user
has defined, and restores the factory default settings in the Miscellaneous
Security menu.
LDAP Certificate Verification
Demand
Try
Allow
Never
Allow the user to request a server certificate.
Notes:
•“Demand” is the factory default setting. This means a server certificate is
requested. If a bad certificate is provided or if no certificate is provided, then
the session is terminated immediately.
•“Try” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, then
the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then the session
is terminated immediately.
•“Allow” means a server certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided,
then the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, then it will
be ignored and the session proceeds normally.
•“Never” means no server certificate is requested.
Minimum PIN Length
1–16
Limit the digit length of the personal identification number (PIN).
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Confidential Print menu
Use To
Max Invalid PIN
Off
2–10
Limit the number of times an invalid PIN can be entered.
Notes:
•This menu appears only when a formatted, non-defective printer hard disk is installed.
•Once the limit is reached, the print jobs for that user name and PIN are deleted.
Confidential Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Limit the amount of time a confidential print job stays in the printer before it is deleted.
Notes:
•If the “Confidential Job Expiration” setting is changed while confidential print jobs
reside in the printer RAM or printer hard disk, then the expiration time for those print
jobs does not change to the new default value.
•If the printer is turned off, then all confidential jobs held in the printer RAM are
deleted.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 140
Use To
Repeat Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs.
Verify Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs needing verification.
Reserve Job Expiration
Off
1 hour
4 hours
24 hours
1 week
Set a time limit on how long the printer stores print jobs for printing at a later time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Erase Temporary Data Files menu
Erase Temporary Data Files deletes only print job data on the printer hard disk that are not currently in use by the file
system. All permanent data on the printer hard disk are preserved, such as downloaded fonts, macros, and held jobs.
Note: This menu appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is installed.
Use To
Wiping Mode
Auto
Specify the mode for erasing temporary data files.
Automatic Method
Single pass
Multiple pass
Mark all disk space used by a previous print job. This method does not permit the file
system to reuse this space until it has been cleared.
Notes:
•“Single pass” is the factory default setting.
•Only automatic wiping enables users to erase temporary data files without
having to turn off the printer for an extended amount of time.
•Highly confidential information should be erased using only the Multiple pass
method.
Understanding printer menus 141
Security Audit Log menu
Use To
Export Log Let an authorized user export the security audit log.
Note: The log can be downloaded from the Embedded Web Server and saved on a
computer.
Delete Log
Yes
No
Specify whether audit logs are deleted.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Configure Log
Enable Audit
Yes
No
Enable Remote Syslog
No
Yes
Remote Syslog Facility
0–23
Severity of events to log
0–7
Specify how audit logs are configured.
Notes:
•Enable Audit determines if events are recorded in the secure audit log and
remote syslog. No is the factory default setting.
•Enable Remote Syslog determines if logs are sent to a remote server. No is the
factory default setting.
•Remote Syslog Facility determines the value used to send logs to the remote
syslog server. 4 is the factory default setting.
•If the security audit log is activated, then the severity value of each event is
recorded. 4 is the factory default setting.
Set Date and Time menu
Use To
Current Date and Time View the current date and time settings for the printer.
Manually Set Date and Time
[input date/time]
Enter the date and time.
Notes:
•Manually setting the date and time sets Enable NTP to No.
•The wizard lets you set the date and time in YYYY‑MM‑DD‑HH:MM format.
Time Zone
[list of time zones]
Select the time zone.
Note: GMT is the factory default settings.
Automatically observe DST
On
Off
Set the printer to use the applicable daylight saving time (DST) start and end times
associated with the printer Time Zone setting.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable NTP
On
Off
Enable Network Time Protocol, which synchronizes the clocks of devices on a
network.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This setting is turned off if you manually set the date and time.
Understanding printer menus 142
Settings menu
General Settings menu
Use To
Display Language
English
Francais
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Portugues
Suomi
Russian
Polski
Greek
Magyar
Turkce
Cesky
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Korean
Japanese
Set the language of the text appearing on the display.
Note: Not all languages are available for all models. You may
need to install a special hardware for some languages.
Show supply estimates
Show estimates
Do not show estimates
View the estimates of the supplies on the control panel, Embedded
Web Server, menu settings, and device statistics reports.
Note: Show estimates is the factory default setting.
Eco-Mode
Off
Energy
Energy/Paper
Paper
Minimize the use of energy, paper, or specialty media.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This resets the printer to its
factory default settings.
•When setting Eco‑Mode to Energy or Paper, performance
may be affected, but print quality is not.
ADF Loaded Beep
Enabled
Disabled
Specify whether the ADF sounds a beep when paper is loaded.
Note: Enabled is the factory default setting.
Quiet Mode
Off
On
Minimize the printer noise.
Note: Off is the factory default setting. This supports the
performance specifications for your printer.
Understanding printer menus 143
Use To
Run Initial setup
Yes
No
Run the setup wizard.
Keyboard
Keyboard Type
English
Francais
Francais Canadien
Deutsch
Italiano
Espanol
Greek
Dansk
Norsk
Nederlands
Svenska
Suomi
Portugues
Russian
Polski
Swiss German
Swiss French
Korean
Magyar
Turkish
Czech
Simplified Chinese
Traditional Chinese
Japanese
Custom Key [x]
Specify a language and custom key information for the printer
keyboard.
Paper Sizes
U.S.
Metric
Specify the unit of measurement for paper sizes.
Notes:
•U.S. is the factory default setting.
•Initial setting is determined by your country or region
selection in the initial setup wizard.
Scan to PC Port Range
[port range]
Specify a valid port range for printers behind a port blocking
firewall.
Note: 9751:12000 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 144
Use To
Displayed Information
Left side
Right side
Custom Text [x]
[text entry]
Specify what is displayed on the upper corners of the home screen.
For Left side and Right side, select from the following options:
None
IP Address
Hostname
Contact Name
Location
Date/Time
mDNS/DDNS Service Name
Zero Configuration Name
Model Name
Custom Text [x]
Notes:
•IP Address is the factory default setting for Left side.
•Date/Time is the factory default setting for Right side.
Displayed Information (continued)
Black Toner
Cyan Toner
Magenta Toner
Yellow Toner
Fuser
Transfer Module
Customize the displayed information for the supplies.
Select from the following options:
When to display
Do not display
Display
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•Do not display is the factory default setting for When to
display.
•Default is the factory default setting for Message to display.
Understanding printer menus 145
Use To
Displayed Information (continued)
Waste Toner Bottle
Paper Jam
Load Paper
Service Errors
Customize the displayed information for certain menus.
Select from the following options:
Display
Yes
No
Message to display
Default
Alternate
Default
[text entry]
Alternate
[text entry]
Notes:
•No is the factory default setting for Activate.
•Default is the factory default setting for Type of Message to
Display.
Home screen customization
Change Language
Copy
Copy Shortcuts
Fax
Fax Shortcuts
E‑mail
E‑mail Shortcuts
FTP
FTP Shortcuts
Search Held Jobs
Held Jobs
USB Drive
Profiles and Apps
Bookmarks
Jobs by User
Forms and Favorites
Card Copy
Scan to Network
My Shortcut
Add or remove icons that appear on the home screen.
For each icon, select from the following options:
Display
Do Not Display
Notes:
•Display is the factory default setting for Copy, Fax, E‑mail,
FTP, Search Held Jobs, Held jobs, USB Drive, Forms and
Favorites, Card Copy, Scan to Network, and MyShortcut
menus.
•Do not display is the factory default setting for Change
language, Copy shortcuts, Fax Shortcuts, E‑mail Shortcuts,
FTP Shortcuts, Profiles and Apps, Bookmarks, and Jobs by
User menus.
Date Format
MM‑DD‑YYYY
DD‑MM‑YYYY
YYYY‑MM‑DD
Format the date.
Note: MM‑DD‑YYYY is the U.S. factory default setting. DD-MM-
YYYY is the international factory default setting.
Time Format
12 hour A.M./P.M.
24 hour clock
Format the time.
Note: 12 hour A.M./P.M. is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 146
Use To
Screen Brightness
20–100
Specify the brightness of the display.
Note: 100 is the factory default setting.
One Page Copy
Off
On
Set copies from the scanner glass to only one page at a time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Audio Feedback
Button Feedback
On
Off
Volume
1–10
Set the audio volume for the buttons.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting for Button Feedback.
•5 is the factory default setting for Volume.
Show Bookmarks
Yes
No
Specify whether bookmarks are displayed from the Held Jobs area.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Background Removal
On
Off
Specify whether image background removal is allowed.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow Custom Job Scans
On
Off
Scan multiple jobs to one file.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Scanner Jam Recovery
Job level
Page level
Specify how a scanned job should be reloaded if a paper jam occurs
in the ADF.
Notes:
•Job level is the factory default setting.
•If Job level is selected, then the entire job must be rescanned
if any pages jam.
•If Page level is selected, then rescan from the jammed page
forward.
Web Page Refresh Rate
30–300
Specify the number of seconds between Embedded Web Server
refreshes.
Note: 120 is the factory default setting.
Contact Name Specify a contact name.
Note: The contact name is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Location Specify the location.
Note: The location is stored on the Embedded Web Server.
Understanding printer menus 147
Use To
Alarms
Alarm Control
Cartridge Alarm
Set an alarm when the printer requires user intervention.
For each alarm type, select from the following options:
•Off
•Single
•Continuous
Notes:
•Single is the factory default setting for Alarm Control and
Cartridge Alarm. This sounds three quick beeps.
•Continuous repeats three beeps every 10 seconds.
Timeouts
Standby Mode
Disabled
1–240
Set the amount of time in minutes before the printer enters a lower
power state.
Note: 15 is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Sleep Mode
Disabled
1–120
Set the amount of time in minutes the printer waits after a job is
printed before it goes into a reduced power state.
Notes:
•20 is the factory default setting.
•Lower settings conserve more energy, but may require
longer warm‑up times.
•Select the lowest setting if the printer shares an electrical
circuit with room lighting or you notice lights flickering in the
room.
•Select a high setting if the printer is in constant use. Under
most circumstances, this keeps the printer ready to print
with minimum warm‑up time.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout
Disabled
1–3 hours
6 hours
1–3 days
1–2 weeks
1 month
Set the amount of time the printer waits before it enters Hibernate
mode.
Note: 3 days is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Hibernate Timeout on Connection
Hibernate
Do Not Hibernate
Set the printer to Hibernate mode even if there is an active Ethernet
connection.
Note: Do Not Hibernate is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Screen Timeout
15–300
Set the amount of time in seconds before returning the control
panel to a Ready state.
Note: 30 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 148
Use To
Timeouts
Prolong Screen Timeout
On
Off
Set the printer to continue a specified job without returning to the
home screen when the screen timeout timer expires.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Timeouts
Print Timeout
Disabled
1–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits to receive an
end‑of‑job message before canceling the rest of the print job.
Notes:
•90 is the factory default setting.
•When the timer expires, any partially printed page still in the
printer is printed, and then the printer checks to see if any
new print jobs are waiting.
•Print Timeout is available only when using PCL emulation.
This has no effect on PostScript emulation jobs.
Timeouts
Wait Timeout
Disabled
15–65535
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for additional
data before canceling a print job.
Notes:
•40 is the factory default setting.
•Wait Timeout is available only when the printer is using
PostScript emulation. This has no effect on PCL emulation
print jobs.
Timeouts
Job Hold Timeout
5–255
Set the amount of time in seconds the printer waits for user
intervention before it holds jobs that require unavailable resources
and continues to print other jobs in the print queue.
Notes:
•30 is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is
installed.
Error Recovery
Auto Reboot
Reboot when idle
Reboot always
Reboot never
Set the printer to restart when an error occurs.
Note: Reboot always is the factory default setting.
Error Recovery
Max Auto Reboots
1–20
Determine the number of automatic reboots the printer can
perform.
Note: 2 is the factory default setting.
Print Recovery
Auto Continue
Disabled
5–255
Let the printer automatically continue printing from certain offline
situations when these are not resolved within the specified time
period.
Note: Disabled is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 149
Use To
Print Recovery
Jam Recovery
On
Off
Auto
Specify whether the printer reprints jammed pages.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer reprints
jammed pages unless the memory required to hold the pages is
needed for other printer tasks.
Print Recovery
Page Protect
Off
On
Successfully print a page that may not have printed otherwise.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This prints a partial page
when there is not enough memory to print the whole page.
•On sets the printer to process the whole page so that the
entire page prints.
Press Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a short
press of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Sleep is the factory default setting.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
control panel to exit Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Press and Hold Sleep Button
Do Nothing
Sleep
Hibernate
Determine how the printer, while in idle state, reacts to a long press
of the Sleep button.
Notes:
•Do Nothing is the factory default setting.
•Touch anywhere on the display or press a button on the
control panel to exit Sleep or Hibernate mode.
Factory Defaults
Do Not Restore
Restore Now
Use the printer factory default settings.
Note: Do Not Restore is the factory default setting.
Export Configuration Package
Export
Export the configuration files to a flash drive.
Copy Settings menu
Use To
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 150
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specify whether copies are printed in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Allow color copies
On
Off
Enable color in copies.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Setting this to Off hides all color‑specific menus.
•This setting overrides the Color setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided to 1 sided
1 sided to 2 sided
2 sided to 1 sided
2 sided to 2 sided
Specify whether an original document is two‑sided or one‑sided, and then specify
whether the copy should be two‑sided or one‑sided.
Note: 1 sided to 1 sided is the factory default setting. This setting is selected when
using a one‑sided original document for a one‑sided copy job.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑up Portrait
2‑up Landscape
4‑up Portrait
4‑up Landscape
Copy two or four sheets of a document on one page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Print Page Borders
On
Off
Specify whether a border is printed.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 151
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
ID Card
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory default
setting.
Copy To Source
Tray [x]
Manual Feeder
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for copy jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Transparency Separators
On
Off
Place a sheet of paper between transparencies.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Place a sheet of paper between pages, copies, or jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Number of Copies
1–9999
Specify the number of copies for the copy job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 152
Use To
Header/Footer
[Location]
Off
Date/Time
Page number
Custom text
Print on
All pages
First page only
All but first page
Custom text
Specify header and footer information and its location on the page.
Select from the following location options:
•Top left
•Top middle
•Top right
•Bottom left
•Bottom middle
•Bottom right
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting for the location.
•All pages is the factory default setting for Print on.
Overlay
Confidential
Copy
Draft
Urgent
Custom
Off
Specify the overlay text printed on each page of the copy job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Custom Overlay Specify the custom overlay text.
Allow priority copies
On
Off
Allow interruption of a print job to copy a page or document.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single copy job.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save custom copy settings as shortcuts.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Auto Center
Off
On
Automatically align the content at the center of the page.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding printer menus 153
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
Off
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify if the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of a copy.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Sample Copy
Off
On
Create a sample copy of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 154
Fax Settings menu
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) menu
Analog Fax Setup mode sends the fax job through a telephone line.
General Fax Settings
Use To
Restore Factory Defaults Restore the factory defaults of all fax settings.
Optimize Fax Compatibility Optimize fax compatibility with other fax machines.
Fax Name Specify the name of the fax in the printer.
Fax Number Specify the telephone number assigned to the fax.
Fax ID
Fax Name
Fax Number
Specify how the fax is identified.
Note: Fax Number is the factory default setting.
Enable Manual Fax
On
Off
Set the printer to fax manually, which requires a line splitter and a telephone handset.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Use a regular telephone to answer an incoming fax job and to dial a fax
number.
•Press # 0 on the numeric keypad to go directly to the Manual Fax function.
Memory Use
All receive
Mostly receive
Equal
Mostly send
All send
Define the allocation of non-volatile memory between sending and receiving fax jobs.
Note: Equal is the factory default setting.
Cancel Faxes
Allow
Don't Allow
Specify whether canceling of fax jobs is allowed.
Note: Allow is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
Off
Primary
Alternate
Specify the type of caller ID being used.
Fax number masking
Off
From left
From right
Specify the direction from where digits are masked in an outgoing fax number.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•The number of characters masked is determined by the Digits to Mask setting.
Digits to Mask
0–58
Specify the number of digits to mask in an outgoing fax number.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 155
Use To
Fax Cover Page
Fax Cover Page
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Include to Field
On
Off
Include from Field
On
Off
From
Include Message Field
On
Off
Message
Include Logo
On
Off
Include Footer [x]
On
Off
Footer [x]
Configure the fax cover page.
Notes:
•Off by default is the factory default setting for Fax Cover Page.
•Off is the factory default setting for all other menu items.
Fax Send Settings
Use To
Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi). A higher resolution gives better print quality, but
increases the fax transmission time for outgoing faxes.
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 156
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two-sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Dial Prefix Enter a dialing prefix, such as 99. A numeric entry field is provided.
Dialing Prefix Rules
Prefix Rule [x]
Establish a dialing prefix rule.
Understanding printer menus 157
Use To
Automatic Redial
0–9
Specify the number of times the printer tries to send the fax to a specified number.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Redial frequency
1–200
Specify the number of minutes between redials.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Behind a PABX
Yes
No
Enable or disable switchboard blind dialing without a dial tone.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Enable ECM
Yes
No
Enable or disable Error Correction Mode for fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Enable Fax Scans
On
Off
Fax files that are scanned at the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Driver to fax
Yes
No
Allow the print driver to send fax jobs.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save fax numbers as shortcuts in the printer.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Dial Mode
Tone
Pulse
Specify the dialing sound.
Note: Tone is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are sent.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Scan a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single file.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Show whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 158
Use To
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the scanned image.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast in the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
Off
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the sharpness of a fax.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 159
Use To
Enable Color Fax Scans
Off by default
On by default
Never use
Always use
Enable color faxing.
Note: Off by default is the factory default setting.
Auto Convert Color Faxes to Mono
Faxes
On
Off
Convert all outgoing faxes to black and white.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Receive Settings
Use To
Enable Fax Receive
On
Off
Allow the printer to receive fax jobs.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Caller ID
On
Off
Display the caller ID information of an incoming fax.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Job Waiting
None
Toner
Toner and Supplies
Remove fax jobs from the print queue when the job requires specific unavailable
resources.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Rings to Answer
1–25
Specify the number of rings before answering an incoming fax job.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Auto Answer
Yes
No
Set the printer to receive faxes automatically.
Note: Yes is the factory default setting.
Manual Answer Code
0–9
Manually enter a code on the telephone number pad to begin receiving a fax.
Notes:
•9 is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is used when the printer shares a line with a telephone.
Auto Reduction
On
Off
Scale an incoming fax job so that it fits the size of the paper loaded in the designated
fax source.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Auto
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing incoming fax jobs.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 160
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
Off
On
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheets
Off
Before Job
After Job
Enable the printer to include separator sheets for incoming fax jobs.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Fax Footer
On
Off
Print the transmission information at the bottom of each page from a received fax.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Max Speed
2400
4800
9600
14400
33600
Specify the maximum speed in baud at which faxes are received.
Note: 33600 is the factory default setting.
Fax Forwarding
Print
Print and Forward
Forward
Enable forwarding of received faxes to another recipient.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Forward to
Fax
E‑mail
FTP
LDSS
eSF
Specify the type of recipient to which faxes are forwarded.
Notes:
•Fax is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is available only from the printer Embedded Web Server.
Forward to Shortcut Enter the shortcut number which matches the recipient type (Fax, E-mail, FTP, LDSS,
or eSF).
Block No Name Fax
Off
On
Enable blocking of incoming faxes sent from devices with no station ID or fax ID
specified.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Banned Fax List Enable the list of blocked fax numbers stored in the printer.
Holding Faxes
Held Fax Mode
Off
Always On
Manual
Scheduled
Fax Holding Schedule
Enable the printer to hold received faxes from printing until they are released. Held
faxes can be released manually or at a scheduled day or time.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 161
Use To
Enable Color Fax Receive
On
Off
Enable the printer to receive fax in color and print it in grayscale.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Fax Log Settings
Use To
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Enable printing of a transmission log after each fax job.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Receive Error Log
Print Never
Print on Error
Enable printing of a receive error log.
Note: Print Never is the factory default setting.
Auto Print Logs
On
Off
Enable automatic printing of fax logs.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•Logs print after every 200 fax jobs.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the source of the paper used for printing logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Logs Display
Remote Station Name
Dialed Number
Specify whether printed logs display the dialed number or the station name or fax
name returned.
Note: Remote Station Name is the factory default setting.
Enable Job Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Job log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Enable Call Log
On
Off
Enable access to the Fax Call log.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Speaker Settings
Use To
Speaker Mode
Always Off
On until Connected
Always On
Specify the mode of the speaker.
Note: On until Connected is the factory default setting. A sound is issued until the
fax connection is made.
Speaker Volume
High
Low
Set the speaker volume to high or low.
Note: High is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 162
Use To
Ringer Volume
Off
On
Enable or disable the ringer volume.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Answer On
Use To
All Rings
Single Ring Only
Double Ring Only
Triple Ring Only
Single or Double Rings Only
Single or Triple Rings Only
Double or Triple Rings Only
Specify ring patterns when the printer is answering calls.
Note: All Rings is the factory default setting.
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) menu
Fax Mode sends the fax job to a fax server for transmission.
Use To
To Format Enter specific fax information using the control panel.
Reply Address
Subject
Message
SMTP Setup Specify SMTP setup information.
Primary SMTP Gateway Specify SMTP server port information.
Secondary SMTP Gateway
Image Format
PDF (.pdf)
XPS (.xps)
TIFF (.tif)
Specify the image format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 163
Use To
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the content was originally produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Fax Resolution
Standard
Fine 200 dpi
Super Fine 300 dpi
Ultra Fine 600 dpi
Specify quality in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: Standard is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
4 x 6 in.
3 x 5 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Mixed Sizes is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single‑page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑fax job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the scan job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 164
Use To
Enable Analog Receive
Off
On
Enable receiving of analog faxes.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Settings menu
Use To
E‑mail Server Setup
Subject
Message
File Name
Specify e‑mail server information.
E‑mail Server Setup
Send me a copy
Never appears
On by default
Off by default
Always On
Send a copy of the e-mail to the sender.
Note: Never appears is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Server Setup
Max E‑mail size
0–65535 KB
Specify the maximum e-mail size.
Note: E-mails bigger than the specified maximum size are not sent.
E‑mail Server Setup
Size Error Message
Send a message when an e-mail is greater than the configured size limit.
E‑mail Server Setup
Limit destinations
Specify a domain name, such as a company domain name, and then limit e‑mail
destinations only to that domain name.
Notes:
•E-mail can be sent only to the specified domain.
•The limit is one domain.
E‑mail Server Setup
Web Link Setup
Server
Login
Password
Path
File Name
Web Link
Define the e‑mail server Web link settings.
Note: The characters * : ? < > | are invalid entries for a path name.
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 165
Use To
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF. If On is selected, then you
need to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch.
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 166
Use To
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long Edge
Short Edge
Specify the orientation of the original document loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text image in relation to file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text or photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail images sent as
Attachment
Web Link
Specify how the images are sent.
Note: Attachment is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page Scan to E-mail job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the
pages, or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 167
Use To
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for printing e-mail logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
E‑mail Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images when
Color is set to Off.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
Custom Job scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Save e-mail addresses as shortcuts.
Notes:
•On is the factory default setting.
•When set to Off, the Save As Shortcut button does not appear on the e-mail
Destination screen.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Understanding printer menus 168
Use To
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
Off
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Use cc:/bcc:
Off
On
Enable the use of the cc: and bcc: fields.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 169
FTP Settings menu
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression. This menu item
appears only when a formatted, working hard disk is installed.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
Off
On
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 170
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the quality of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Understanding printer menus 171
Use To
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the
image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to the file size and quality of the image.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page of the job.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
TIFF Compression
LZW
JPEG
Specify the format used in compressing TIFF files.
Note: LZW is the factory default setting.
Transmission Log
Print log
Do not print log
Print only for error
Specify whether to print the transmission log.
Note: Print log is the factory default setting.
Log Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify a paper source when printing FTP logs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
FTP bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to have smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes into a single scan job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Allow Save as Shortcut
On
Off
Enable shortcut creation for FTP addresses.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 172
Use To
Color Balance
Cyan‑Red
Magenta‑Green
Yellow‑Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the output.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
Off
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Notes:
•Auto is the factory default setting.
•This menu item is supported only in some printer models.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness of the scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Enable the user to specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output
than the default while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 173
Flash Drive menu
Scan Settings
Use To
Format
PDF (.pdf)
TIFF (.tif)
JPEG (.jpg)
XPS (.xps)
RTF (.rtf)
TXT (.txt)
Specify the file format.
Note: PDF (.pdf) is the factory default setting.
PDF Settings
PDF Version
1.2–1.7
A–1a
A–1b
PDF Compression
Normal
High
Secure PDF
Off
On
Searchable PDF
Off
On
Configure the PDF settings.
Notes:
•1.5 is the factory default setting for PDF Version.
•Normal is the factory default setting for PDF Compression.
•Off is the factory default setting for Secure PDF and Searchable PDF. Secure
PDF requires you to enter your password twice.
Content Type
Text
Graphics
Text/Photo
Photo
Specify the content of the original document.
Note: Text/Photo is the factory default setting.
Content Source
Black/White Laser
Color Laser
Inkjet
Photo/Film
Magazine
Newspaper
Press
Other
Specify how the original document was produced.
Note: Color Laser is the factory default setting.
Color
On
Off
Specify whether the printer captures and transmits content in color.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 174
Use To
Resolution
75 dpi
150 dpi
200 dpi
300 dpi
400 dpi
600 dpi
Specify the resolution of the scan in dots per inch (dpi).
Note: 150 dpi is the factory default setting.
Darkness
1–9
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of the scanned image.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Original Size
Letter
Legal
Executive
Folio
Statement
Oficio (Mexico)
Universal
Auto Size Sense
Mixed Sizes
A4
A5
A6
JIS B5
Custom Scan Size [x]
Book Original
Business Card
3 x 5 in.
4 x 6 in.
Specify the size of the original document.
Note: Letter is the U.S. factory default setting. A4 is the international factory
default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
Off
Long edge
Short edge
Specify the orientation of the original documents loaded in the ADF for two‑sided
scanning.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
JPEG Quality
Best for content
5–90
Set the quality of a JPEG photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Notes:
•Best for content is the factory default setting.
•5 reduces the file size, but the quality of the image is lessened.
•90 provides the best image quality, but the file size is very large.
Text Default
5–90
Set the quality of the text in relation to file size and the quality of the image.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 175
Use To
Text/Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a text/photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 75 is the factory default setting.
Photo Default
5–90
Set the quality of a photo image in relation to file size and quality.
Note: 50 is the factory default setting.
Use Multi‑Page TIFF
On
Off
Provide a choice between single-page TIFF files and multiple‑page TIFF files. For a
multiple-page scan‑to‑FTP job, either one TIFF file is created containing all the pages,
or multiple TIFF files are created with one file for each page.
Note: On is the factory default setting.
Scan Bit Depth
1 bit
8 bit
Enable the Text/Photo mode to produce smaller file sizes by using 1‑bit images.
Note: 8 bit is the factory default setting.
File Name Type a base file name.
Custom Job Scanning
On
Off
Copy a document that contains mixed paper sizes.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Scan Preview
On
Off
Specify whether a preview appears on the display for scan jobs.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed.
Background Removal
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of background visible on a copy.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan - Red
Magenta - Green
Yellow - Blue
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Color Dropout
Color Dropout
None
Red
Green
Blue
Default Red Threshold
0–255
Default Green Threshold
0–255
Default Blue Threshold
0–255
Specify which color to drop and to adjust the dropout setting for each color threshold.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting for Color Dropout.
•128 is the factory default setting for each color threshold.
Contrast
0–5
Best for content
Specify the contrast of the scanned image.
Note: Best for content is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 176
Use To
Mirror Image
Off
On
Create a mirror image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Negative Image
Off
On
Create a negative image of the original document.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Shadow Detail
‑4 to 4
Adjust the amount of shadow detail visible on a scanned image.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Adjust ADF Skew
Auto
Off
On
Correct slight skew in the scanned image.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Scan edge to edge
Off
On
Specify whether the original document is scanned edge-to-edge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Sharpness
1–5
Adjust the amount of sharpness on a scanned image.
Note: 3 is the factory default setting.
Temperature
‑4 to 4
Specify warm or cool outputs. Cool values generate a bluer output than the default
while warm values generate a redder output than the default.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Print Settings
Copies
1–999
Specify a default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Paper Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Manual Envelope
Set a default paper source for all print jobs.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Color
Color
Black only
Specify whether to print the document in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: (1,2,3) (1,2,3) is the factory default setting.
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Enable two‑sided printing for incoming print jobs.
Note: 1 sided is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 177
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for two-sided pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long edge of the
page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for portrait and
left edge for landscape).
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation of a multiple‑page document.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple-page images on one side of the paper.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border on each page image.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the positioning of multiple‑page images.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in portrait or in
landscape orientation.
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether to insert blank separator sheets.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Separator Sheet Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for separator sheets.
Note: Tray 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to insert blank pages in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 178
Print Settings
Setup menu
Use To
Printer Language
PCL Emulation
PS Emulation
Set the default printer language.
Notes:
•PS Emulation is the factory default printer language.
•Setting a printer language as the default does not prevent a software
program from sending print jobs that use another printer language.
Job Waiting
On
Off
Specify that print jobs be removed from the print queue if they require unavailable
printer options or custom settings. They are stored in a separate print queue, so
other jobs print normally. When the missing information or options are obtained,
the stored jobs print.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, working printer hard disk is
installed. This requirement ensures that stored jobs are not deleted if the
printer loses power.
Print Area
Normal
Fit to Page
Whole Page
Set the logical and physical printable area.
Notes:
•Normal is the factory default setting. When attempting to print data in the
non‑printable area defined by the Normal setting, the printer clips the image
at the boundary.
•Whole Page allows the image to be moved into the non‑printable area
defined by the Normal setting. Whole Page only affects pages printed using a
PCL 5e interpreter. This setting has no effect on pages printed using the
PCL XL or PostScript interpreter.
Printer Usage
Max Yield
Max Speed
Set the printer for a faster print speed or for a higher toner yield.
Note: Max Yield is the factory default setting.
Black Only Mode
On
Off
Set the printer to print text and graphics using only the black toner cartridge.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Download Target
RAM
Flash
Disk
Set the storage location for downloads.
Notes:
•RAM is the factory default setting. Storing downloads in the RAM is
temporary.
•Storing downloads in flash memory or on a printer hard disk places them in
permanent storage. Downloads remain in flash memory or on the printer
hard disk even when the printer is turned off.
•This menu item appears only when a flash drive or a formatted, working
printer hard disk is installed.
Understanding printer menus 179
Use To
Resource Save
On
Off
Specify how the printer handles temporary downloads, such as fonts and macros
stored in the RAM, when the printer receives a job that requires more memory than
is available.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting. This sets the printer to retain the downloads
only until memory is needed. Downloads are deleted in order to process print
jobs.
•On retains the downloads during language changes and printer resets. If the
printer runs out of memory, then Memory Full [38] appears, and
downloads are not deleted.
Print All Order
Alphabetical
Oldest First
Newest First
Specify the order in which held and confidential jobs are printed when Print All is
selected.
Note: Alphabetical is the factory default setting. Print jobs always appear in
alphabetical order on the printer control panel.
Finishing menu
Use To
Sides (Duplex)
1 sided
2 sided
Specify whether two‑sided (duplex) printing is set as the default for all print jobs.
Notes:
•“1 sided” is the factory default setting.
•You can set two‑sided printing from the printer software.
For Windows users:
Click File > Print, and then click Properties, Preferences, Options, or Setup.
For Macintosh users:
Choose File > Print, and then adjust the settings from the Print dialog and pop‑up
menus.
Duplex Binding
Long Edge
Short Edge
Define binding for duplexed pages in relation to page orientation.
Notes:
•Long Edge is the factory default setting. This assumes binding along the long
edge of the page (left edge for portrait and top edge for landscape).
•Short Edge assumes binding along the short edge of the page (top edge for
portrait and left edge for landscape).
Copies
1–999
Specify the default number of copies for each print job.
Note: 1 is the factory default setting.
Blank Pages
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether blank pages are inserted in a print job.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
Collate
(1,1,1) (2,2,2)
(1,2,3) (1,2,3)
Stack the pages of a print job in sequence when printing multiple copies.
Note: “(1,2,3) (1,2,3)” is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 180
Use To
Separator Sheets
Off
Between Copies
Between Jobs
Between Pages
Specify whether blank separator sheets are inserted.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Between Copies inserts a blank sheet between each copy of a print job if
Collate is set to “(1,2,3) (1,2,3).” If Collate is set to “(1,1,1) (2,2,2),” then a
blank page is inserted between each set of printed pages, such as after all
page 1's and after all page 2's.
•Between Jobs inserts a blank sheet between print jobs.
•Between Pages inserts a blank sheet between each page of a print job. This
setting is useful when printing transparencies or when inserting blank pages in
a document.
Separator Source
Tray [x]
Multipurpose Feeder
Specify the paper source for the separator sheet.
Note: Tray 1 (standard tray) is the factory default setting.
Paper Saver
Off
2‑Up
3‑Up
4‑Up
6‑Up
9‑Up
12‑Up
16‑Up
Print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•When the number of pages per sheet is selected, each page is scaled so that
the number of pages you want can be displayed on the sheet.
Paper Saver Ordering
Horizontal
Reverse Horizontal
Reverse Vertical
Vertical
Specify the order in which pages are printed on a single sheet when using Paper Saver.
Notes:
•Horizontal is the factory default setting.
•Positioning depends on the number of page images and whether they are in
portrait or in landscape orientation.
Paper Saver Orientation
Auto
Landscape
Portrait
Specify the orientation in which pages are printed on a single sheet.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting. The printer chooses between portrait and
landscape.
Paper Saver Border
None
Solid
Print a border when using Paper Saver.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Quality menu
Use To
Print Mode
Color
Black Only
Specify whether to print images in color.
Note: Color is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 181
Use To
Color Correction
Auto
Off
Manual
Adjust the color output on the printed page.
Note: Auto is the factory default setting.
Print Resolution
1200 dpi
4800 CQ
Specify the output resolution in dots per inch (dpi) or in color quality (CQ).
Note: 4800 CQ is the factory default setting.
Toner Darkness
1–5
Lighten or darken the output.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
Enhance Fine Lines
On
Off
Enable a print mode preferable for files such as architectural drawings, maps, electrical
circuit diagrams, and flow charts.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Color Saver
On
Off
Reduce the amount of toner used for graphics and images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•On overrides the Toner Darkness setting.
RGB Brightness
‑6 to 6
Adjust the brightness of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Contrast
0–5
Adjust the contrast of the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
RGB Saturation
0–5
Adjust saturation in color outputs.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Color Balance
Cyan
‑5 to 5
Magenta
‑5 to 5
Yellow
‑5 to 5
Black
‑5 to 5
Reset Defaults
Enable an equal balance of colors in the output.
Note: 0 is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 182
Use To
Color Samples
sRGB Display
sRGB Vivid
Display—True Black
Vivid
Off—RGB
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off—CMYK
Print sample pages for each of the RGB and CMYK color conversion tables used in the
printer.
Manual Color
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
Customize the RGB color conversions.
Select from the following options:
Vivid
sRGB Display
Display—True Black
sRGB Vivid
Off
Notes:
•sRGB Display is the factory default setting for RGB Image.
•sRGB Vivid is the factory default setting for RGB Text and RGB Graphics.
Manual Color (continued)
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
Customize the CMYK color conversions.
Select from the following options:
US CMYK
Euro CMYK
Vivid CMYK
Off
Note: US CMYK is the U.S. factory default setting. Euro CMYK is the international
factory default setting.
Color Adjust Initiate a recalibration of color conversion tables and allow the printer to make
adjustments for color variations in output.
Spot Color Replacement Assign specific CMYK values to named spot colors.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
RGB Replacement Match the colors of the output with that of the original document.
Note: This menu is available only on the Embedded Web Server.
Job Accounting menu
Note: This menu item appears only when a printer hard disk is installed. Make sure that the hard disk is not
read/write‑ or write‑protected.
Understanding printer menus 183
Use To
Job Accounting Log
Off
On
Set if the printer creates a log of the print jobs it receives.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Job Accounting Utilities Print and delete log files or export them to a flash drive.
Accounting Log Frequency
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
Set how often a log file is created.
Note: Monthly is the factory default setting.
Log Action at End of Frequency
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Set how the printer responds when the frequency threshold expires.
Note: None is the factory default setting.
Log Near Full Level
Off
1–99
Specify the maximum size of the log file before the printer executes the Log Action
at Near Full.
Note: 5 is the factory default setting.
Log Action at Near Full
None
E‑mail Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post Current Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Set how the printer responds when the hard disk is nearly full.
Notes:
•None is the factory default setting.
•The value defined in Log Near Full Level determines when this action is
triggered.
Log Action at Full
None
E‑mail & Delete Current Log
E‑mail & Delete Oldest Log
Post & Delete Current Log
Post & Delete Oldest Log
Delete Current Log
Delete Oldest Log
Delete All Logs
Delete All But Current
Set how the printer responds when disk usage reaches the maximum limit (100MB).
Note: None is the factory default setting.
URL to Post Logs Set where the printer posts job accounting logs.
E‑mail to Send Logs Specify the e‑mail address to which the device sends job accounting logs.
Understanding printer menus 184
Use To
Log File Prefix Specify the prefix you want for the log file name.
Note: The current host name defined in the TCP/IP menu is used as the default log
file prefix.
Utilities menu
Use To
Remove Held Jobs
Confidential
Held
Not Restored
All
Delete confidential and held jobs from the printer hard disk.
Notes:
•Selecting a setting affects only print jobs that are resident in the printer.
Bookmarks, print jobs on flash drives, and other types of held jobs are not
affected.
•Not Restored removes all Print and Hold jobs that are not restored from the
printer hard disk or memory.
Format Flash
Yes
No
Format the flash memory.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not turn off the printer while the flash memory is
being formatted.
Notes:
•Yes deletes all data stored in flash memory.
•No cancels the format request.
•Flash memory refers to the memory added by installing a flash memory card in
the printer.
•The flash memory option card must not be read/write‑ or write‑protected.
•This menu item appears only when a non‑defective flash memory card is
installed.
Delete Downloads on Disk
Delete Now
Do Not Delete
Delete downloads from the printer hard disk, including all held jobs, buffered jobs,
and parked jobs.
Notes:
•Delete Now sets the printer to delete the downloads and allows the display to
return to the originating screen after the deletion.
•Do Not Delete sets the printer display to return to the main Utilities menu for
touch‑screen printer models. When selected in non‑touch‑screen printer
models, Do Not Delete sets the printer to return to the originating screen after
the deletion.
Activate Hex Trace Assist in isolating the source of a print job problem.
Notes:
•When activated, all data sent to the printer is printed in hexadecimal and
character representation, and control codes are not executed.
•To exit or deactivate Hex Trace, turn off or reset the printer.
Understanding printer menus 185
Use To
Coverage Estimator
Off
On
Provide an estimate of the percentage coverage of toner on a page. The estimate is
printed on a separate page at the end of each print job.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
XPS menu
Use To
Print Error Pages
Off
On
Print a page containing information on errors, including XML markup errors.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PDF menu
Use To
Scale to Fit
Yes
No
Scale page content to fit the selected paper size.
Note: No is the factory default setting.
Annotations
Do Not Print
Print
Print annotations in a PDF.
Note: Do Not Print is the factory default setting.
PostScript menu
Use To
Print PS Error
On
Off
Print a page containing the PostScript error.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Lock PS Startup Mode
On
Off
Enable users to disable the SysStart file.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Font Priority
Resident
Flash/Disk
Establish the font search order.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting.
•This menu item appears only when a formatted, non‑defective flash
memory option card or printer hard disk is installed.
•Make sure the flash memory option or printer hard disk is not
read/write‑, write‑, or password‑protected.
•Job Buffer Size must not be set to 100%.
Understanding printer menus 186
Use To
Image Smoothing
On
Off
Enhance the contrast and sharpness of low‑resolution images and smoothen
their color transitions.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•Image Smoothing has no effect on images that are 300 dpi or higher in
resolution.
PCL Emul menu
Use To
Font Source
Resident
Disk
Download
Flash
All
Specify the set of fonts used in the Font Name menu.
Notes:
•Resident is the factory default setting. It shows the factory default set of
fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•Flash and Disk settings show all fonts resident in that option. Make sure
the flash option is properly formatted and is not read/write‑, or
password‑protected.
•Download shows all the fonts downloaded in the RAM.
•All shows all fonts available to any option.
Font Name
Courier 10
Identify a specific font and where it is stored.
Note: Courier 10 is the factory default setting.
Symbol Set
10U PC‑8
12U PC‑850
Specify the symbol set for each font name.
Notes:
•10U PC‑8 is the US factory default setting. 12U PC‑850 is the international
factory default setting.
•A symbol set is a set of alphabetical and numeric characters, punctuation,
and special symbols. Symbol sets support the different languages or
specific programs such as math symbols for scientific text. Only the
supported symbol sets are shown.
PCL Emulation Settings
Point Size
1.00–1008.00
Change the point size for scalable typographic fonts.
Notes:
•12 is the factory default setting.
•Point size refers to the height of the characters in the font. One point
equals approximately 0.014 of an inch. This can be increased or decreased
in 0.25‑point increments.
Understanding printer menus 187
Use To
PCL Emulation Settings
Pitch
0.08–100.00
Specify the font pitch for scalable monospaced fonts.
Notes:
•10 is the factory default setting.
•Pitch refers to the number of fixed‑space characters per inch (cpi). This
can be increased or decreased in 0.01‑cpi increments.
•For non‑scalable monospaced fonts, the pitch appears on the display but
cannot be changed.
PCL Emulation Settings
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Specify the orientation of text and graphics on a page.
Notes:
•Portrait is the factory default setting. It prints text and graphics parallel to
the short edge of the page.
•Landscape prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the page.
PCL Emulation Settings
Lines per Page
1–255
Specify the number of lines that print on each page.
Notes:
•60 is the US factory default setting. 64 is the international default setting.
•The printer sets the amount of space between each line based on the
Lines per Page, Paper Size, and Orientation settings. Select the paper size
and orientation before setting Lines per Page.
PCL Emulation Settings
A4 Width
198 mm
203 mm
Set the printer to print on A4‑size paper.
Notes:
•198 mm is the factory default setting.
•The 203‑mm setting sets the width of the page to allow the printing of
eighty 10‑pitch characters.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto CR after LF
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a carriage return (CR) after
a line feed (LF) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
PCL Emulation Settings
Auto LF after CR
On
Off
Specify whether the printer automatically performs a line feed (LF) after a
carriage return (CR) control command.
Note: Off is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 188
Use To
Tray Renumber
Assign MP Feeder
Off
None
0–199
Assign Tray [x]
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Paper
Off
None
0–199
Assign Manual Envelope
Off
None
0–199
Configure the printer to work with printer software or programs that use
different source assignments for trays, drawers, and feeders.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•None ignores the Select Paper Feed command. This selection appears
only when it is selected by the PCL 5e interpreter.
•0–199 allows a custom setting to be assigned.
Tray Renumber
View Factory Defaults
MPF Default = 8
T1 Default = 1
T2 Default = 4
T3 Default = 5
T4 Default = 20
T5 Default = 21
Env Default = 6
MPaper Default = 2
MEnv Default = 3
Display the factory default setting assigned to each tray, drawer, or feeder.
Tray Renumber
Restore Defaults
Yes
No
Return all tray, drawer, and feeder assignments to the factory default settings.
Understanding printer menus 189
HTML menu
Use To
Font Name
Albertus MT
Antique Olive
Apple Chancery
Arial MT
Avant Garde
Bodoni
Bookman
Chicago
Clarendon
Cooper Black
Copperplate
Coronet
Courier
Eurostile
Garamond
Geneva
Gill Sans
Goudy
Helvetica
Hoefler Text
Intl CG Times
Intl Courier
Intl Univers
Joanna MT
Letter Gothic
Lubalin Graph
Marigold
MonaLisa Recut
Monaco
New CenturySbk
New York
Optima
Oxford
Palatino
StempelGaramond
Taffy
Times
TimesNewRoman
Univers
Zapf Chancery
NewSansMTCS
NewSansMTCT
New SansMTJA
NewSansMTKO
Set the default font for HTML documents.
Note: The Times font is used in HTML documents that do not
specify a font.
Use To
Font Size
1–255 pt
Set the default font size for HTML documents.
Notes:
•12 pt is the factory default setting.
•Font size can be increased in 1‑point increments.
Scale
1–400%
Scale the default font for HTML documents.
Notes:
•100% is the factory default setting.
•Scaling can be increased in 1% increments.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Set the page orientation for HTML documents.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Understanding printer menus 190
Use To
Margin Size
8–255 mm
Set the page margin for HTML documents.
Notes:
•19 mm is the factory default setting.
•Margin size can be increased in 1‑mm increments.
Backgrounds
Do Not Print
Print
Specify whether to print backgrounds on HTML documents.
Note: Print is the factory default setting.
Image menu
Use To
Auto Fit
On
Off
Select the optimal paper size, scaling, and orientation.
Note: On is the factory default setting. It overrides scaling and orientation settings
for some images.
Invert
On
Off
Invert bitonal monochrome images.
Notes:
•Off is the factory default setting.
•This setting does not apply to GIF or JPEG images.
Scaling
Anchor Top Left
Best Fit
Anchor Center
Fit Height/Width
Fit Height
Fit Width
Scale the image to fit the selected paper size.
Notes:
•Best Fit is the factory default setting.
•When Auto Fit is set to On, Scaling is automatically set to Best Fit.
Orientation
Portrait
Landscape
Reverse Portrait
Reverse Landscape
Set the image orientation.
Note: Portrait is the factory default setting.
Help menu
Menu item Description
Print All Guides Prints all the guides
Copy Guide Provides information about making copies and configuring the settings
E‑mail Guide Provides information about sending e‑mails and configuring the settings
Fax Guide Provides information about sending faxes and configuring the settings
FTP Guide Provides information about scanning documents and configuring the settings
Understanding printer menus 191
Menu item Description
Color Quality Provides information about solving color quality issues
Print Defects Guide Provides help in resolving repeating defects in copies or prints
Information Guide Provides help in locating additional information
Supplies Guide Provides information about ordering supplies
Understanding printer menus 192
Saving money and the environment
Lexmark is committed to environmental sustainability and is continually improving its printers to reduce their impact
on the environment. We design with the environment in mind, engineer our packaging to reduce materials, and provide
collection and recycling programs. For more information, see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
By selecting certain printer settings or tasks, you may be able to reduce your printer's impact even further. This chapter
outlines the settings and tasks that may yield a greater environmental benefit.
Saving paper and toner
Studies show that as much as 80% of the carbon footprint of a printer is related to paper usage. You can significantly
reduce your carbon footprint by using recycled paper and the following printing suggestions, such as printing on both
sides of the paper and printing multiple pages on one side of a single sheet of paper.
For information on how you can quickly save paper and energy using one printer setting, see “Using Eco‑Mode” on
page 194.
Using recycled paper
As an environmentally conscious company, Lexmark supports the use of recycled office paper produced specifically for
use in laser printers. For more information on recycled papers that work well with your printer, see “Using recycled
paper and other office papers” on page 56.
Conserving supplies
Use both sides of the paper
If your printer model supports two‑sided printing, then you can control whether print appears on one or two sides of
the paper.
Notes:
•Two-sided printing is the default setting in the print driver.
•For a complete list of supported products and countries, go to http://support.lexmark.com.
Place multiple pages on one sheet of paper
You can print up to 16 consecutive pages of a multiple‑page document onto one side of a single sheet of paper by
setting multiple page printing (N‑Up) for the print job.
Saving money and the environment 193
Check your first draft for accuracy
Before printing or making multiple copies of a document:
•Use the preview feature to see how the document looks like before you print it.
•Print one copy of the document to check its content and format for accuracy.
Avoid paper jams
Correctly set the paper type and size to avoid paper jams. For more information, see “Avoiding jams” on page 233.
Saving energy
Using Eco‑Mode
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Eco‑Mode > select a setting
Use To
Off Use the factory default settings for all settings associated with Eco‑Mode. Off supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
Energy Reduce energy use, especially when the printer is idle.
•Printer engine motors do not start until it is ready to print. You may notice a short delay before the
first page is printed.
•The printer enters Sleep mode after one minute of inactivity.
Energy/Paper Use all the settings associated with Energy and Paper modes.
Plain Paper •Enable the automatic two‑sided (duplex) feature.
•Turn off print log features.
3Click Submit.
Reducing printer noise
Enable Quiet Mode to reduce printer noise.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Quiet Mode > select a setting
Saving money and the environment 194
Use To
On Reduce printer noise.
Notes:
•Print jobs are processed at a reduced speed.
•Printer engine motors do not start until a document
is ready to print. There will be a short delay before
the first page is printed.
Off Use factory default settings.
Note: This setting supports the performance
specifications of the printer.
3Click Submit.
Adjusting Sleep mode
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Sleep Mode
2In the Sleep Mode field, select the number of minutes the printer is idle before it enters Sleep mode.
3Apply the changes.
Using Hibernate mode
Hibernate is an ultra‑low‑power saving mode.
Notes:
•Three days is the default amount of time before the printer enters Hibernate mode.
•Make sure to wake the printer from Hibernate mode before sending a print job. A hard reset or a long press of
the Sleep button wakes the printer from Hibernate mode.
•If the printer is in Hibernate mode, then the Embedded Web Server is disabled.
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2Touch Press Sleep Button or Press and Hold Sleep Button.
3Touch Hibernate > .
Setting Hibernate Timeout
Hibernate Timeout lets you set the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it goes into a
reduced power state.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Saving money and the environment 195
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Timeouts.
3From the Hibernate Timeout menu, select the number of hours, days, weeks, or months you want for the printer
to wait before it goes into a reduced power state.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts > Hibernate Timeout
2Select the amount of time the printer waits after a print job is processed before it enters Hibernate mode.
3Touch .
Using Schedule Power Modes
Schedule Power Modes lets you schedule when the printer goes into a reduced power state or into Ready state.
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > General Settings > Schedule Power Modes.
3From the Action menu, select the power mode.
4From the Time menu, select the time.
5From the Day(s) menu, select the day or days.
6Click Add.
Adjusting the brightness of the printer display
To save energy, or if you have trouble reading from the display, adjust the brightness of the display.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Saving money and the environment 196
Notes:
•The IP address is located on the upper portion of the home screen. It appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Select Settings > General Settings.
3In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
4Apply the changes.
Using the control panel
1From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings
2In the Screen Brightness field, enter the brightness percentage you want for the display.
3Apply the changes.
Recycling
Lexmark provides collection programs and environmentally progressive approaches to recycling. For more information,
see:
•The Notices chapter
•The Environmental Sustainability section of the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com/environment
•The Lexmark recycling program at www.lexmark.com/recycle
Recycling Lexmark products
To return Lexmark products for recycling:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2Find the product type you want to recycle, and then select your country or region from the list.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Note: Printer supplies and hardware not listed in the Lexmark collection program may be recycled through your local
recycling center. Contact your local recycling center to determine the items they accept.
Recycling Lexmark packaging
Lexmark continually strives to minimize packaging. Less packaging helps to ensure that Lexmark printers are transported
in the most efficient and environmentally sensitive manner and that there is less packaging to dispose of. These
efficiencies result in fewer greenhouse emissions, energy savings, and natural resource savings.
Lexmark cartons are 100% recyclable where corrugated recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your area.
The foam used in Lexmark packaging is recyclable where foam recycling facilities exist. Facilities may not exist in your
area.
Saving money and the environment 197
When you return a cartridge to Lexmark, you can reuse the box that the cartridge came in. Lexmark will recycle the
box.
Returning Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling
Lexmark Cartridge Collection Program diverts millions of Lexmark cartridges from landfills annually by making it both
easy and free for Lexmark customers to return used cartridges to Lexmark for reuse or recycling. One hundred percent
of the empty cartridges returned to Lexmark are either reused or demanufactured for recycling. Boxes used to return
the cartridges are also recycled.
To return Lexmark cartridges for reuse or recycling, follow the instructions that came with your printer or cartridge and
use the prepaid shipping label. You can also do the following:
1Go to www.lexmark.com/recycle.
2From the Toner Cartridges section, select your country or region.
3Follow the instructions on the computer screen.
Saving money and the environment 198
Securing the printer
Using the security lock feature
The printer is equipped with a security lock feature. Attach a security lock compatible with most laptop computers in
the location shown to secure the printer in place.
Statement of Volatility
Your printer contains various types of memory that can store device and network settings, and user data.
Type of memory Description
Volatile memory Your printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to
temporarily buffer user data during simple print jobs.
Non-volatile memory Your printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory:
EEPROM and NAND (flash memory). Both types are used to
store the operating system, device settings, network
information and bookmark settings, and embedded
solutions.
Hard disk memory Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer
hard disk is designed for printer-specific functionality. This
lets the printer retain buffered user data from complex print
jobs, as well as form data, and font data.
Erase the content of any installed printer memory in the following circumstances:
•The printer is being decommissioned.
•The printer hard disk is being replaced.
Securing the printer 199
•The printer is being moved to a different department or location.
•The printer is being serviced by someone from outside your organization.
•The printer is being removed from your premises for service.
•The printer is being sold to another organization.
Disposing of a printer hard disk
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
In high‑security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer hard disk cannot be accessed when the printer—or its hard disk—is removed from your premises.
•Degaussing—Flushes the hard disk with a magnetic field that erases stored data
•Crushing—Physically compresses the hard disk to break component parts and render them unreadable
•Milling—Physically shreds the hard disk into small metal bits
Note: Most data can be erased electronically, but the only way to guarantee that all data are completely erased is to
physically destroy each hard disk where data is stored.
Erasing volatile memory
The volatile memory (RAM) installed in your printer requires a power source to retain information. To erase the buffered
data, simply turn off the printer.
Erasing non‑volatile memory
Erase individual settings, device and network settings, security settings, and embedded solutions by following these
steps:
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 on the keypad while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the
progress bar appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display instead of the standard home screen icons.
3Touch Wipe All Settings.
The printer will restart several times during this process.
Note: Wipe All Settings securely removes device settings, solutions, jobs, and passwords from the printer
memory.
4Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Securing the printer 200
Erasing printer hard disk memory
Notes:
•Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
•Configuring Erase Temporary Data Files in the printer menus lets you remove residual confidential material left
by print jobs by securely overwriting files that have been marked for deletion.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, the touch screen displays a list of functions.
3Touch Wipe Disk, and then touch one of the following:
•Wipe disk (fast)—This lets you overwrite the disk with all zeroes in a single pass.
•Wipe disk (secure)—This lets you overwrite the disk with random bit patterns several times, followed by a
verification pass. A secure overwrite is compliant with the DoD 5220.22‑M standard for securely erasing data
from a hard disk. Highly confidential information should be wiped using this method.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task.
•Disk wiping can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be unavailable
for other user tasks.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Configuring printer hard disk encryption
Enable hard disk encryption to prevent loss of sensitive data in the event the printer or its hard disk is stolen.
Note: Some printer models may not have a printer hard disk installed.
Using the Embedded Web Server
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Security > Disk Encryption.
Note: Disk Encryption appears in the Security Menu only when a formatted, non‑defective printer hard disk is
installed.
Securing the printer 201
3From the Disk encryption menu, select Enable.
Notes:
•Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
4Click Submit.
Using the printer control panel
1Turn off the printer.
2Hold down 2 and 6 while turning the printer on. Release the buttons only when the screen with the progress bar
appears.
The printer performs a power-on sequence, and then the Configuration menu appears. When the printer is fully
turned on, a list of functions appears on the printer display.
3Touch Disk Encryption > Enable.
Note: Enabling disk encryption will erase the contents of the printer hard disk.
4Touch Yes to proceed with disk wiping.
Notes:
•Do not turn off the printer during the encryption process. Doing so may result in loss of data.
•Disk encryption can take from several minutes to more than an hour, during which the printer will be
unavailable for other user tasks.
•A status bar will indicate the progress of the disk wiping task. After the disk has been encrypted, the printer
will return to the Enable/Disable screen.
5Touch Back > Exit Config Menu.
The printer will perform a power‑on reset, and then return to normal operating mode.
Finding printer security information
In high-security environments, it may be necessary to take additional steps to make sure that confidential data stored
in the printer cannot be accessed by unauthorized persons. For more information, visit the
Lexmark security Web page.
You can also see the Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide for additional information:
1Go to www.lexmark.com, and then navigate to Support & Downloads > select your printer.
2Click the Manuals tab, and then select Embedded Web Server — Security: Administrator’s Guide.
Securing the printer 202
Maintaining the printer
Periodically, certain tasks are required to maintain optimum print quality.
Storing supplies
Choose a cool, clean storage area for the printer supplies. Store supplies right side up in their original packing until you
are ready to use them.
Do not expose supplies to:
•Direct sunlight
•Temperatures above 35°C (95°F)
•High humidity above 80%
•Salty air
•Corrosive gases
•Heavy dust
Cleaning the printer
Cleaning the printer
Note: You may need to perform this task after every few months.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer
warranty.
1Make sure that the printer is turned off and unplugged from the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the printer,
unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.
2Remove paper from the standard bin, multipurpose feeder, and manual feeder.
3Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4Dampen a clean, lint-free cloth with water, and use it to wipe the outside of the printer.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of
the printer.
5Make sure all areas of the printer are dry before sending a new print job.
Maintaining the printer 203
Cleaning the scanner glass
Clean the scanner glass if you encounter print quality problems, such as streaks on copied or scanned images.
1Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2Open the scanner cover.
3Clean all the areas shown, and then let them dry.
1White underside of the ADF cover
2White underside of the scanner cover
3Scanner glass
4ADF glass
4Close the scanner cover.
Maintaining the printer 204
Checking the status of parts and supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies on the printer control panel
From the home screen, navigate to:
Status/Supplies > View Supplies
Checking the status of parts and supplies from the Embedded Web Server
Note: Make sure the computer and the printer are connected to the same network.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Device Status > More Details.
Estimated number of remaining pages
The estimated number of remaining pages is based on the recent printing history of the printer. Its accuracy may
vary significantly and is dependent on many factors, such as actual document content, print quality settings, and
other printer settings.
The accuracy of the estimated number of remaining pages may decrease when the actual printing consumption is
different from the historical printing consumption. Consider the variable level of accuracy before purchasing or replacing
supplies based on the estimate. Until an adequate print history is obtained on the printer, initial estimates assume
future supplies consumption based on the International Organization for Standardization* test methods and page
content.
* Average continuous black or composite CMY declared cartridge yield in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.
Maintaining the printer 205
Ordering supplies
To order supplies in the U.S., contact Lexmark at 1-800-539-6275 for information about Lexmark authorized supplies
dealers in your area. In other countries or regions, go to the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com or contact the
place where you purchased the printer.
Note: All life estimates for printer supplies assume printing on letter‑ or A4‑size plain paper.
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components. Use of third-party
supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts is not covered
by the warranty. All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver
unpredictable results if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may
damage your Lexmark printer or its associated components.
Ordering toner cartridges
Notes:
•The estimated cartridge yield is based on the ISO/IEC 19798 standard.
•Extremely low print coverage for extended periods of time may negatively affect actual yield and may cause
cartridge parts to fail prior to exhaustion of toner.
Return Program cartridges
Item United States and Canada European Union (EU),
European Economic Area
(EEA), and Switzerland
Rest of the world
Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801K 802K 808K
Cyan 801C 802C 808C
Magenta 801M 802M 808M
Yellow 801Y 802Y 808Y
Standard Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801SK 802SK 808SK
Cyan 801SC 802SC 808SC
Magenta 801SM 802SM 808SM
Yellow 801SY 802SY 808SY
High Yield Return Program toner cartridges
Black 801HK 802HK 808HK
Cyan 801HC 802HC 808HC
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.
Maintaining the printer 206
Item United States and Canada European Union (EU),
European Economic Area
(EEA), and Switzerland
Rest of the world
Magenta 801HM 802HM 808HM
Yellow 801HY 802HY 808HY
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.
Item Worldwide
Standard Yield regular toner cartridges
Black 800S1
Cyan 800S2
Magenta 800S3
Yellow 800S4
High Yield regular toner cartridges
Black 800H1
Cyan 800H2
Magenta 800H3
Yellow 800H4
For more information on countries located in each region, visit www.lexmark.com/regions.
Ordering imaging kits
Item All countries and regions
Black imaging kit 700Z1
Color imaging kit 700Z5
Ordering a maintenance kit
Notes:
•Using certain types of paper may require more frequent replacement of the maintenance kit.
•The fuser and transfer module are included in the maintenance kit and can also be individually ordered and
replaced, if necessary.
•To replace the maintenance kit, contact customer support at http://support.lexmark.com or your service
representative.
Part name Type Supply number
Maintenance kit 115 V
220 V
100 V
40X7615
40X7616
40X7617
Maintaining the printer 207
Ordering a waste toner bottle
Item All countries and regions
Waste toner bottle C540X75G
Replacing supplies
Replacing the waste toner bottle
1Top door
2Waste toner bottle
3Right side cover
4Front door
1Unpack the replacement waste toner bottle.
2Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Maintaining the printer 208
3Open the top door.
4Remove the right side cover.
Maintaining the printer 209
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
6Seal the used waste toner bottle in the enclosed packaging.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 197.
7Insert the replacement waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 210
8Insert the right side cover.
9Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
10 Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer 211
Replacing a black and color imaging kit
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Open the top door.
Maintaining the printer 212
3Remove the toner cartridges by lifting the handles, and then gently pulling them away from the imaging kit.
4Remove the right side cover.
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 213
6Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
7Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
8Unpack the replacement black and color imaging kit.
Notes:
•The color imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the cyan, magenta, yellow, and black developer units.
•The black imaging kit includes the imaging kit and the black developer unit.
9Seal the used imaging kit in the bag that the replacement imaging kit came in.
Maintaining the printer 214
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 197.
Note: When replacing the black imaging kit, save the cyan, magenta, and yellow developer units. Dispose only
the black developer unit.
10 Gently shake the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units side‑to‑side.
11 Remove the red packing strip and the attached fabric from the developer units.
12 Gently insert the yellow, cyan, magenta, and black developer units.
Maintaining the printer 215
Note: Make sure each developer unit is inserted into the matching color slot.
13 Remove the red packing strip from the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the shiny photoconductor drum under the imaging kit. Doing so may
affect the quality of future print jobs.
14 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
Maintaining the printer 216
15 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
16 Insert the waste toner bottle.
17 Insert the right side cover.
Maintaining the printer 217
18 Insert the toner cartridges.
19 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
20 Close the front door.
Maintaining the printer 218
Replacing toner cartridges
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage caused by use of a non‑Lexmark toner cartridge is not covered under
warranty.
Note: A reduced print quality may result from using non‑Lexmark toner cartridges.
1Open the top door.
2Remove the toner cartridge by lifting the handle, and then gently pulling it away from the imaging kit.
Maintaining the printer 219
3Unpack the new toner cartridge, and then remove its packaging.
4Align the new toner cartridge, and then press the cartridge down until it fits into place.
5Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
6Seal the used toner cartridge in the bag that the replacement toner cartridge came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 197.
Maintaining the printer 220
Replacing a developer unit
Replace the developer unit when a print quality defect occurs or when damage occurs to the printer.
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
2Open the top door.
Maintaining the printer 221
3Lift the toner cartridge handle, and then gently pull it from the imaging kit.
4Remove the right side cover.
5Press the green levers on each side of the waste toner bottle, and then remove the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 222
6Lift the blue levers on the imaging kit, and then pull the imaging kit until it stops.
7Press down the blue lever, and then grasp the green handles on the sides to pull out the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit. Doing so could damage the
imaging kit.
8Remove the used developer unit.
Maintaining the printer 223
9Gently shake the replacement developer unit side‑to‑side before removing it from its packaging.
10 Remove the red shipping cover from the developer unit.
11 Insert the developer unit.
Maintaining the printer 224
12 Align and then insert the imaging kit.
13 Gently but firmly push the blue levers down until the imaging kit fits into place.
Note: Make sure that the imaging kit is fully seated.
14 Replace the waste toner bottle.
Maintaining the printer 225
15 Insert the right side cover.
16 Insert the toner cartridges.
17 Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
Maintaining the printer 226
18 Close the front door.
19 Seal the used developer unit in the bag that the replacement developer unit came in.
For more information, see “Recycling Lexmark products” on page 197.
Moving the printer
Before moving the printer
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb) and requires two or more
trained personnel to lift it safely.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Before moving the printer, follow these guidelines to avoid personal injury or
printer damage:
•Turn the printer off using the power switch, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
•Disconnect all cords and cables from the printer before moving it.
•Lift the printer off the optional tray, and then set it aside instead of trying to lift the tray and printer at the same
time.
Note: Use the handholds located on both sides of the printer to lift it.
Warning—Potential Damage: Damage to the printer caused by improper moving is not covered by the printer
warranty.
Moving the printer to another location
The printer and its hardware options can be safely moved to another location by following these precautions:
•Any cart used to move the printer must have a surface able to support the full footprint of the printer.
•Any cart used to move the hardware options must have a surface able to support the dimensions of the hardware
options.
•Keep the printer in an upright position.
•Avoid severe jarring movements.
Maintaining the printer 227
Shipping the printer
When shipping the printer, use the original packaging.
Maintaining the printer 228
Managing the printer
Finding advanced networking and administrator information
This chapter covers basic administrative support tasks using the Embedded Web Server. For more advanced system
support tasks, see the Networking Guide on the Software and Documentation CD or the Embedded Web Server —
Security: Administrator's Guide on the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Checking the virtual display
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Check the virtual display that appears at the top left corner of the screen.
The virtual display works as an actual display would work on a printer control panel.
Setting up e‑mail alerts
Configure the printer to send you e‑mail alerts when the supplies are getting low or when the paper needs to be changed
or added, or when there is a paper jam.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings.
3From the Other Settings menu, click E‑mail Alert Setup.
4Select the items you want to be notified on, and then type the e‑mail addresses.
5Click Submit.
Note: For information on setting up the e‑mail server, contact your system support person.
Viewing reports
You can view some reports from the Embedded Web Server. These reports are useful for assessing the status of the
printer, network, and supplies.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Managing the printer 229
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP address appears as four sets of numbers
separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Reports, and then click the type of report you want to view.
Configuring supply notifications from the Embedded Web
Server
You can determine how you would like to be notified when supplies run nearly low, low, very low, or reach their
end‑of‑life by setting the selectable alerts.
Notes:
•You can select alerts for toner cartridges, imaging kit, maintenance kit, and waste toner bottle.
•All alerts can be set for nearly low, low, and very low supply conditions. Not all alerts can be set for the
end‑of‑life supply condition. E‑mail alert is available for all supply conditions.
•The percentage of estimated remaining supply that prompts the alert can be set on some supplies for some
supply conditions.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings > Print Settings > Supply Notifications.
3From the drop‑down menu for each supply, select one of the following notification options:
Notification Description
Off The normal printer behavior for all supplies occurs.
E‑mail Only The printer generates an e-mail when the supply condition is reached. The status of the
supply appears on the menus page and status page.
Warning The printer shows the warning message and generates an email about the status of the
supply. The printer does not stop when the supply condition is reached.
Continuable Stop1The printer stops processing jobs when the supply condition is reached. The user needs to
press a button to continue printing.
Non Continuable Stop1,2 The printer stops when the supply condition is reached. The supply must be replaced to
continue printing.
1 The printer generates an e-mail about the status of the supply when supply notification is enabled.
2 The printer stops when some supplies become empty to prevent damage.
4Click Submit.
Managing the printer 230
Modifying confidential print settings
Note: This feature is available only in network printers or printers connected to print servers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click Settings tab > Security > Confidential Print Setup.
3Modify the settings:
•Set a maximum number of PIN entry attempts. When a user exceeds a specific number of PIN entry attempts,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
•Set an expiration time for confidential print jobs. When a user has not printed the jobs within the specified time,
all of the jobs for that user are deleted.
4Save the modified settings.
Copying printer settings to other printers
Note: This feature is available only in network printers.
1Open a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address in the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu. The IP address appears as four
sets of numbers separated by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to load the Web page correctly.
2Click the Copy Printer Settings.
3To change the language, select a language from the drop-down menu, and then click Click here to submit language.
4Click Printer Settings.
5Type the IP addresses of the source and target printers in their appropriate fields.
Note: If you want to add or remove a target printer, then click Add Target IP or Remove Target IP.
6Click Copy Printer Settings.
Restoring factory default settings
If you want to keep a list of the current menu settings for reference, then print a menu settings page before restoring
the factory default settings. For more information, see “Printing a menu settings page” on page 39.
If you want a more comprehensive method of restoring the printer factory default settings, then perform the Wipe All
Settings option. For more information, see “Erasing non‑volatile memory” on page 200.
Managing the printer 231
Warning—Potential Damage: Restoring factory defaults returns most printer settings to the original factory default
settings. Exceptions include the display language, custom sizes and messages, and network/port menu settings. All
downloads stored in the RAM are deleted. Downloads stored in the flash memory or in a printer hard disk are not
affected.
From the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Factory Defaults > Restore Now >
Managing the printer 232
Clearing jams
By carefully selecting paper and specialty media and loading it properly, you should be able to avoid most jams. If jams
occur, then follow the steps outlined in this chapter.
Warning—Potential Damage: Never use any tool to remove a jam. Doing so could permanently damage the fuser.
Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper
•Do not remove a tray while the printer is printing.
•Do not load a tray while the printer is printing. Load it before printing, or wait for a prompt to load it.
•Do not load too much paper. Make sure the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
Clearing jams 233
•Do not slide the paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.
•Make sure the guides in the tray or the multipurpose feeder are properly positioned and are not pressing tightly
against the paper or envelopes.
•Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.
Use recommended paper
•Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
•Do not load wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled paper.
•Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading it.
•Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.
•Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
•Make sure the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
•Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.
Understanding jam messages and locations
When a jam occurs, a message indicating the jam location and information to clear the jam appears on the printer
display. Open the doors, covers, and trays indicated on the display to remove the jam.
Note: When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages. However, Auto does not
guarantee that the page will print.
Clearing jams 234
Jam location Message on the display What to do
1Automatic document
feeder (ADF)
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder
top cover [28y.xx]
Remove all paper from the ADF tray, and then
remove the jammed paper.
2Standard bin [x]‑page jam, clear standard
bin [203.xx]
Remove the jammed paper.
3Fuser [x]‑page jam, open front door to clear
fuser [202.xx]
Open the front door, then pull the tab and hold the
fuser cover down, and then remove the jammed
paper.
4Front door [x]‑page jam, open front door [20y.xx] Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper.
5Duplex area [x]‑page jam, open front door to clear
duplex [23y.xx]
Open the front door, and then remove the jammed
paper.
6Tray [x] [x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx] Pull out the indicated tray, and then remove the
jammed paper.
7Multipurpose feeder [x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
feeder [250.xx]
Push the paper release lever to lift the paper rollers,
and then remove the jammed paper.
8Manual feeder [x]‑page jam, clear manual
feeder [251.xx]
Remove the jammed paper.
Clearing jams 235
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin [203.xx]
1Open the top door.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 236
3Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
aIf there is a jammed paper under the fuser, then firmly grasp the paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 237
bPull the green lever to open the fuser cover.
cIf there is a jammed paper in the fuser, then hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 238
4Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
5Close the front door.
6From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
[x]-page jam, open front door to clear fuser [202.xx]
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clearing jams 239
2Open the top door.
Clearing jams 240
3Pull the green lever to open the fuser cover.
4Hold down the fuser cover, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 241
5Slide and hold the release latch on the right side of the printer, and then slowly close the top door.
6Close the front door.
7From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
[x]-page jam, open front door [20y.xx]
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clearing jams 242
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the front door.
4From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
[x]‑page jam, open front door to clear duplex [23y.xx]
1Open the front door.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching.
Clearing jams 243
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Close the front door.
4From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x] [24y.xx]
1Pull out the tray completely.
Note: The message on the printer display indicates the tray where the jammed paper is located.
Clearing jams 244
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Insert the tray.
4From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
Clearing jams 245
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder [251.xx]
1Pull out the standard 250-sheet tray (Tray 1) and manual feeder.
2Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
3Insert the tray.
4From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > Clear the jam, press OK, and then press to confirm.
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose feeder [250.xx]
1Push the paper release lever in the multipurpose feeder to access the jammed paper, and then gently pull out the
paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
Clearing jams 246
2Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the
edges on a level surface.
3Reload paper into the multipurpose feeder.
Clearing jams 247
4Slide the paper guide until it rests lightly against the edge of the paper stack.
1
2
5From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .
[x]‑page jam, open automatic feeder top cover. [28y.xx]
1Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
Note: The message is cleared when the pages are removed from the ADF tray.
2Open the ADF cover.
3Firmly grasp the jammed paper on each side, and then gently pull it out.
Clearing jams 248
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.
4Close the ADF cover.
5Straighten the edges of the original documents, then load the documents into the ADF, and then adjust the paper
guide.
6From the printer control panel, touch to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer
models, select Next > > Clear the jam, press OK > .
Clearing jams 249
Troubleshooting
Understanding the printer messages
Adjusting color
Wait for the process to complete.
Change [paper source] to [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Change [paper source] to [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size and type of paper in the tray, and then select Finished changing paper on the printer control
panel to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Cancel the print job.
Close door
Make sure the right side cover is installed, and then close the front and top doors to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 250
Close flatbed cover and load originals if restarting job [2yy.xx]
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
•Select Scan from automatic feeder, and then press to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Scan from flatbed, and then press to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Finish job without further scanning, and then press to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying or
e-mailing.
•Select Restart Job, and then press to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
•Select Cancel Job, and then press to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy]
You may need to order a toner cartridge. If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
[Color] cartridge nearly low [88.xy]
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
[Color] cartridge very low, [x] estimated pages remain [88.xy]
You may need to replace the toner cartridge very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Complex page, some data may not have printed [39]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Install additional printer memory.
Troubleshooting 251
Configuration change, some held jobs were not restored [57]
Held jobs are invalidated because of any of the following possible changes in the printer:
•The printer firmware has been updated.
•The tray for the print job is removed.
•The print job is sent from a flash drive that is no longer attached to the USB port.
•The printer hard disk contains print jobs that were stored when the hard disk was installed in a different printer
model.
Note: The printer hard disk and the flash drive are supported only in select printer models.
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Defective flash detected [51]
Try one or more of the following:
•Replace the defective flash memory card.
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to ignore the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job.
Disk full [62]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message and continue processing.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the printer hard disk.
•Install a printer hard disk with larger capacity.
Disk must be formatted for use in this device
From the printer control panel, touch Format disk to format the printer hard disk and clear the message.
Note: Formatting deletes all the files stored in the printer hard disk.
Error reading USB drive. Remove USB.
An unsupported USB device is inserted. Remove the USB device, and then insert a supported one.
Error reading USB hub. Remove hub.
An unsupported USB hub has been inserted. Remove the USB hub, and then install a supported one.
Incompatible tray [x] [59]
Remove, and then reinstall the indicated tray to clear the message.
Troubleshooting 252
Incorrect paper size, open [paper source] [34]
Note: The paper source can be a tray or a feeder.
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the correct size of paper in the paper source.
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and print using a different paper source. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Check the length and width guides of the paper source and make sure the paper is loaded properly.
•Make sure the correct paper size and type are specified in the Printing Preferences or in the Print dialog.
•Make sure the paper size and type are specified in the Paper menu on the printer control panel.
•Make sure that the paper size is correctly set. For example, if Multipurpose Feeder Size is set to Universal, then
make sure the paper is large enough for the data being printed.
•Cancel the print job.
Insert Tray [x]
Insert the indicated tray into the printer.
Insufficient memory for Flash Memory Defragment operation [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data from the printer memory.
•Install additional printer memory.
Insufficient memory, some Held Jobs were deleted [37]
The printer deleted some held jobs in order to process current jobs.
Select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press to confirm.
Insufficient memory to collate job [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to print the part of the job already stored and begin collating the
rest of the print job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the current print job.
Insufficient memory to support Resource Save feature [35]
Install additional printer memory or select Continue on the printer control panel to disable Resource Save, clear the
message, and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 253
Insufficient memory, some held jobs will not be restored [37]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non-touch-screen printer models, press
to confirm.
•Delete other held jobs to free up additional printer memory.
Load [paper source] with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper
source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the indicated tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray with the correct paper size or type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer finds a tray that has the correct paper type and size, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot find a tray with the correct paper type and size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load [paper source] with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size, select Finished loading paper on the printer control panel.
For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size, then it feeds from that tray. If the printer
cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size, then it prints from the default paper source.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 254
Load [paper source] with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the tray or feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•To use the tray or feeder with the correct paper size and type, select Finished loading paper on the printer control
panel. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Note: If the printer detects a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it feeds from that tray. If the
printer cannot detect a tray that has the correct paper size and type, then it prints from the default paper
source.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom string]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press on the printer control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [custom type name]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press on the printer control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size of paper.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press on the printer control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current job.
Load Manual Feeder with [paper type] [paper size]
Try one or more of the following:
•Load the feeder with the correct size and type of paper.
•Depending on your printer model, touch Prompt each page, paper loaded or press on the printer control panel
to clear the message and continue printing.
•Cancel the current job.
Troubleshooting 255
Maintenance kit low [80.xy]
You may need to order a maintenance kit. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Maintenance kit nearly low [80.xy]
For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support,
and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models,
press to confirm.
Maintenance kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [80.xy]
You may need to replace the maintenance kit very soon. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact customer support, and then report the message.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Memory full [38]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Cancel job to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
•Install additional printer memory.
Network [x] software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
•Turn off the printer, wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the printer back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 256
Not enough free space in flash memory for resources [52]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
•Delete fonts, macros, and other data stored in the flash memory.
•Upgrade to a larger capacity flash memory card.
Note: Downloaded fonts and macros that are not previously stored in the flash memory are deleted.
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type], see User's Guide [33.xy]
Note: The supply type can be a toner cartridge or the imaging kit.
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
Your Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party supplies
or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts, and may deliver unpredictable results if
third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage your Lexmark
printer or its associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage caused by
the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
To accept any and all of these risks, and to proceed with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in your printer, press
and hold and the # button on the printer control panel simultaneously for 15 seconds.
If you do not wish to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from your printer, and then install
a genuine Lexmark supply or part.
Note: For the list of supported supplies, see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User's Guide or visit
www.lexmark.com.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the missing toner cartridge. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•Remove the unresponsive cartridge, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the cartridge may be defective. Replace the
cartridge.
Reinstall missing or unresponsive [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Troubleshooting 257
Try one or more of the following:
•Install the missing imaging kit. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the User’s Guide.
•Remove the unresponsive imaging kit, and then reinstall it.
Note: If the message appears after reinstalling the supply, then the imaging kit may be defective. Replace the
imaging kit.
Reload printed pages in Tray [x]
Try any of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message and continue printing the second side of the
sheet. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Cancel the print job.
Remove packaging material, [area name]
1Remove any remaining packing material from the indicated location.
2From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Remove paper from standard output bin
Remove the paper stack from the standard bin.
Replace [color] cartridge, 0 estimated pages remain [88.xy]
Replace the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace [color] cartridge, printer region mismatch [42.xy]
Install a toner cartridge that matches the region number of the printer. x indicates the value of the printer region. y
indicates the value of the cartridge region. x and y can have the following values:
Region number Region
0Global
1 United States, Canada
2 European Union (EU), European Economic Area (EEA), Switzerland
8 Rest of the world
9Invalid
Troubleshooting 258
Notes:
•The x and y values represent .xy in the error code that appears on the printer control panel.
•The x and y values must match for printing to continue.
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0 estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Replace the indicated imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace all originals if restarting job.
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
•Select Scan from automatic feeder, and then press to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Scan from flatbed, and then press to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Finish job without further scanning, and then press to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying or
e-mailing.
•Select Restart Job, and then press to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
•Select Cancel Job, and then press to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Remove defective disk [61]
Remove and replace the defective printer hard disk.
Replace defective [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Replace the defective toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Note: If you do not have a replacement toner cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide
or visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace defective [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Replace the defective imaging kit to clear the message and continue printing. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Troubleshooting 259
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace jammed originals if restarting job.
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
•Select Scan from automatic feeder, and then press to continue scanning from the ADF immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Scan from flatbed, and then press to continue scanning from the scanner glass immediately after the
last successful scan job.
•Select Finish job without further scanning, and then press to end the last successful scan job.
Note: This does not cancel the scan job. All successfully scanned pages will be processed further for copying or
e-mailing.
•Select Restart Job, and then press to restart the scan job with the same settings from the previous scan job.
•Select Cancel Job, and then press to clear the message and cancel the scan job.
Replace maintenance kit, 0 estimated pages remain [80.xy]
The printer is scheduled for maintenance. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com or contact your service representative, and then report the message.
Replace missing [color] cartridge [31.xy]
Install the indicated toner cartridge to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section
of the User’s Guide.
Replace missing [type] imaging kit [31.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Install the indicated imaging kit to clear the message. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of
the User’s Guide.
Replace missing waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Install the missing waste toner bottle to clear the message. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came
with the supply.
Replace unsupported [color] cartridge [32.xy]
Remove the toner cartridge, and then install a supported one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement cartridge, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 260
Replace unsupported [type] imaging kit [32.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
Remove the indicated imaging kit, and then install a supported one to clear the message.
Note: If you do not have a replacement imaging kit, then see the “Ordering supplies” section of the User’s Guide or
visit www.lexmark.com.
Replace waste toner bottle [82.xy]
Replace the waste toner bottle to clear the message.
Restore held jobs?
Try one or more of the following:
•Select Restore on the printer control panel to restore all held jobs stored in the printer hard disk. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
•Select Do not restore if you do not want any print jobs to be restored. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Scanner automatic feeder cover open
Close the ADF cover.
Scanner disabled by admin [840.01]
Print without the scanner, or contact your system support person.
Scanner disabled. Contact system administrator if problem persists. [840.02]
From the printer control panel, try one or more of the following:
•Select Continue with scanner disabled to return to the home screen, and then contact your system support person.
•Select Reboot and automatically enable scanner to cancel the job.
Note: This attempts to enable the scanner.
•For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Scanner jam access cover open
Close the bottom ADF access cover to clear the message.
Scanner jam, remove all originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Troubleshooting 261
Scanner jam, remove jammed originals from the scanner [2yy.xx]
Remove the jammed paper from the scanner.
Some held jobs were not restored
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Note: Held jobs that are not restored remain in the printer hard disk and are inaccessible.
SMTP server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Standard network software error [54]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, select Continue to continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
•Turn off the printer and then turn it back on.
•Update the network firmware in the printer or print server. For more information, visit the Lexmark support Web
site at http://support.lexmark.com.
Standard USB port disabled [56]
From the printer control panel, select Continue to clear the message. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press
to confirm.
Notes:
•The printer discards any data received through the USB port.
•Make sure the USB Buffer menu is not set to Disabled.
Supply needed to complete job
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control panel, touch Prompt for supplies to view all error messages that indicate what supplies
are needed to continue processing the current job. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to clear the
message and continue printing.
1Order the missing supply immediately.
2Install the supply. For more information, see the instruction sheet that came with the supply.
•Cancel the print job, then install the missing supply, and then resend the print job.
Troubleshooting 262
Too many flash options installed [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra flash memory.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
Too many trays attached [58]
1Turn off the printer.
2Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
3Remove the extra trays.
4Connect the power cord to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
5Turn the printer back on.
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to order an imaging kit. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message
and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
[Type] imaging kit nearly low [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x] estimated pages remain [84.xy]
Note: The type can be a black imaging kit, or a black and color imaging kit.
You may need to replace the imaging kit very soon. For more information, see the “Replacing supplies” section of the
User’s Guide.
If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the message and continue printing. For
non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Troubleshooting 263
Unformatted flash detected [53]
Try one or more of the following:
•From the printer control, select Continue to stop the defragmentation and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen
printer models, press to confirm.
•Format the flash memory.
Note: If the error message remains, then the flash memory may be defective and need to be replaced.
Waste toner bottle nearly full [82.xy]
You may need to order a waste toner bottle. If necessary, select Continue on the printer control panel to clear the
message and continue printing. For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to confirm.
Weblink server not set up. Contact system administrator.
From the printer control panel, press to clear the message.
Note: If the message appears again, then contact your system support person.
Solving printer problems
•“Basic printer problems” on page 264
•“Option problems” on page 267
•“Paper feed problems” on page 269
Basic printer problems
The printer is not responding
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer is in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Is the printer in Sleep mode or Hibernate mode?
Press the Sleep button
to wake the printer
from Sleep mode or
Hibernate mode.
Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 264
Action Yes No
Step 3
Check if one end of the power cord is plugged into the printer and the
other to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Plug one end of the
power cord into the
printer and the other to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 4
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the electrical outlet.
Does other electrical equipment work?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment,
and then turn on the
printer. If the printer
does not work, then
reconnect the other
electrical equipment.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the cables connecting the printer and the computer are inserted
in the correct ports.
Are the cables inserted in the correct ports?
Go to step 6. Make sure to match the
following:
•The USB symbol on
the cable with the
USB symbol on the
printer
•The appropriate
Ethernet cable with
the Ethernet port
Step 6
Make sure the electrical outlet is not turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 8.
Step 8
Check if one end of the printer cable is plugged into a port on the printer
and the other to the computer, print server, option, or other network
device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 9. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Step 9
Make sure to install all hardware options properly and remove any packing
material.
Are all hardware options properly installed and all packing material
removed?
Go to step 10. Turn off the printer,
remove all packing
materials, then
reinstall the hardware
options, and then turn
on the printer.
Troubleshooting 265
Action Yes No
Step 10
Check if you have selected the correct port settings in the printer driver.
Are the port settings correct?
Go to step 11. Use correct printer
driver settings.
Step 11
Check the installed printer driver.
Is the correct printer driver installed?
Go to step 12. Install the correct
printer driver.
Step 12
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is the printer working?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Printer display is blank
Action Yes No
Step 1
Press the Sleep button on the printer control panel.
Does Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Do Please wait and Ready appear on the printer display?
The problem is solved. Turn off the printer,
and then contact
customer support.
Troubleshooting 266
Option problems
Cannot detect internal option
Action Yes No
Step 1
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn on the
printer.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the internal option is properly installed in the controller board.
aTurn off the printer using the power switch, and then unplug the power
cord from the electrical outlet.
bMake sure the internal option is installed in the appropriate connector
in the controller board.
cConnect the power cord to the printer, then to a properly grounded
electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
Is the internal option properly installed in the controller board?
Go to step 3. Connect the internal
option to the controller
board.
Step 3
Print a menu settings page, and then check to see if the internal option is
listed in the Installed Features list.
Is the internal option listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the internal
option.
Step 4
aCheck if the internal option is selected.
It may be necessary to manually add the internal option in the printer
driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see
“Adding available options in the print driver” on page 35.
bResend the print job.
Does the internal option operate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 267
Cannot detect memory card
Action Yes No
Make sure the memory card is installed.
aInstall the memory card. For more information, see “Installing a
memory card” on page 28.
Note: Check if the memory card is securely connected to the printer
controller board.
bPrint a menu settings page, and then check if the card is listed in the
Installed Options list.
Is the card listed in the Installed Options list?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Tray problems
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Check for paper jams or misfeeds.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•If you are printing on custom‑size paper, then make sure that the
paper guides rest against the edges of the paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
bCheck if the tray closes properly.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aTurn off the printer, then wait about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray working?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the tray is installed and recognized by the printer.
Print a menu settings page, and then check if the tray is listed in the
Installed Features list.
Is the tray listed in the menu settings page?
Go to step 4. Reinstall the tray. For
more information, see
the setup
documentation that
came with the tray.
Troubleshooting 268
Action Yes No
Step 4
Check if the tray is available in the printer driver.
Note: If necessary, manually add the tray in the printer driver to make it
available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 35.
Is the tray available in the printer driver?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Paper feed problems
Jammed pages are not reprinted
Action Yes No
Turn on Jam Recovery.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery
bFrom the Jam Recovery menu, touch the arrows to scroll to On or
Auto.
cTouch Submit.
Do pages reprint after a jam?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Paper frequently jams
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPull out the tray, and then do one or more of the following:
•Make sure paper lies flat in the tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
•Check if the paper guides are aligned against the edges of the
paper.
•Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
•Check if you are printing on a recommended paper size and type.
bInsert the tray properly.
If jam recovery is enabled, then the print jobs will reprint
automatically.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 269
Action Yes No
Step 2
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aReview the tips on avoiding jams. For more information, see “Avoiding
jams” on page 233.
bFollow the recommendations, and then resend the print job.
Do paper jams still occur frequently?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Paper jam message remains after jam is cleared
Action Yes No
Check the entire paper path for jammed paper.
aRemove any jammed paper.
bFrom the printer control panel, touch Continue to clear the message.
Does the paper jam message remain?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 270
Solving print problems
Printing problems
Confidential and other held jobs do not print
Note: Confidential, Verify, Reserve, and Repeat print jobs may be deleted if the printer requires extra memory to
process additional held jobs.
Action Yes No
Step 1
Open the held jobs folder on the printer display, and then verify that your
print job is listed.
Is your print job listed in the held jobs folder?
Go to step 2. Select one of the Print
and Hold options, and
then resend the print
job. For more
information, see
“Printing confidential
and other held jobs” on
page 66.
Step 2
The print job may contain a formatting error or invalid data.
•Delete the print job, and then send it again.
•For PDF files, generate a new PDF, and then print it again.
If you are printing from the Internet, then the printer may be reading
multiple job titles as duplicates and deleting all jobs except the first one.
For Windows users
aOpen the Print Properties folder.
bFrom the Print and Hold dialog, select the “Keep duplicate documents”
check box.
cEnter a PIN number.
For Macintosh users
Save each print job, name each job differently, and then send the
individual jobs to the printer.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Free up additional printer memory by deleting some of the held jobs.
Does the job print?
The problem is solved. Add additional printer
memory.
Troubleshooting 271
Error message about reading the flash drive appears
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the flash drive is inserted into the front USB port.
Note: The flash drive will not work if it is inserted into the rear USB
port.
Is the flash drive inserted into the front USB port?
Go to step 2. Insert the flash drive
into the front USB port.
Step 2
Check if the indicator light on the printer control panel is blinking green.
Note: A green blinking light indicates that the printer is busy.
Is the indicator light blinking green?
Wait until the printer is
ready, then view the
held jobs list, and then
print the documents.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
aCheck for an error message on the display.
bClear the message.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the flash drive is supported.
For more information on tested and approved USB flash drives, see
“Supported flash drives and file types” on page 64.
Does the error message still appear?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Check if the USB port is disabled by the system support person.
Does the error message still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Incorrect characters print
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is not in Hex Trace mode.
Note: If Ready Hex appears on the printer display, then turn off the
printer, and then turn it back on to deactivate Hex Trace mode.
Is the printer in Hex Trace mode?
Deactivate Hex Trace
mode.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, select Standard Network or
Network [x], and then set SmartSwitch to On.
bResend the print job.
Do incorrect characters print?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 272
Job prints from the wrong tray or on the wrong paper
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if you are printing on paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper menu on the printer control panel, set the paper size
and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, open Printing Preferences or
the Print dialog, and then specify the paper type.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the trays are not linked.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print from the correct tray or on the correct paper?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Large jobs do not collate
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Finishing menu on the printer control panel, set Collate to
(1,2,3) (1,2,3).
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer software, set Collate to (1,2,3) (1,2,3).
Note: Setting Collate to (1,1,1) (2,2,2) in the software overrides the
setting in the Finishing menu.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 273
Action Yes No
Step 3
Reduce the complexity of the print job by eliminating the number and size
of fonts, the number and complexity of images, and the number of pages
in the job.
Did the job print and collate correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Multiple‑language PDF files do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if the print options for the PDF output are set to embed all fonts.
For more information, see the documentation that came with Adobe
Acrobat.
bGenerate a new PDF file, and then resend the print job.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aOpen the document you want to print in Adobe Acrobat.
bClick File > Print > Advanced > Print As Image > OK > OK.
Do the files print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Printing slows down
Notes:
•When printing using narrow paper, the printer prints at a reduced speed to prevent damage to the fuser.
•The printer speed may be reduced if printing for long periods of time, or printing at elevated temperatures.
Action Yes No
Place letter‑ or A4‑size paper in the tray, and then resend the print job.
Does the print speed increase?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 274
Print jobs do not print
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the document you are trying to print, open the Print dialog and
check if you have selected the correct printer.
Note: If the printer is not the default printer, then you must select
the printer for each document that you want to print.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aCheck if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the printer display.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
If an error message appears on the printer display, then clear the message.
Note: The printer continues to print after clearing the message.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aCheck if the ports (USB, serial, or Ethernet) are working and if the
cables are securely connected to the computer and the printer.
Note: For more information, see the setup documentation that
came with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
aTurn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
aRemove, and then reinstall the printer software. For more
information, see “Installing the printer” on page 35.
Note: The printer software is available at
http://support.lexmark.com.
bResend the print job.
Do the jobs print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 275
Print job takes longer than expected
Action Yes No
Step 1
Change the environmental settings of the printer.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings
bSelect Eco‑Mode or Quiet Mode, and then select Off.
Note: Disabling Eco-Mode or Quiet Mode may increase the
consumption of energy or supplies, or both.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Reduce the number and size of fonts, the number and complexity of
images, and the number of pages in the print job, and then resend the job
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
aRemove held jobs stored in the printer memory.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
aDisable the Page Protect feature.
From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Settings > General Settings > Print Recovery > Page Protect > Off
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
aCheck if the cable connections to the printer and print server are
secure. For more information, see the setup documentation that came
with the printer.
bResend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Step 6
Install additional printer memory, and then resend the print job.
Did the job print?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 276
Tray linking does not work
Notes:
•The trays can detect paper length.
•The multipurpose feeder does not automatically detect the paper size. You must set the size from the Paper
Size/Type menu.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aOpen the trays, and then check if they contain paper of the same size
and type.
•Check if the paper guides are in the correct positions for the size
of the paper loaded in each tray.
•Check if the paper size indicators on the paper guides are aligned
with the paper size indicators on the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the trays to be linked.
Note: The paper size and type must match for trays to be linked.
bResend the print job.
Do the trays link correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Unexpected page breaks occur
Action Yes No
Increase the printing timeout.
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Timeouts
bIncrease the Print Timeout setting, and then touch Submit.
cResend the print job.
Did the file print correctly?
The problem is solved. Check the original file
for manual page
breaks.
Troubleshooting 277
Print quality problems
Characters have jagged or uneven edges
Action Yes No
Step 1
aPrint a font sample list to check if the fonts you are using are supported
by the printer.
1From the printer control panel, navigate to:
Menus > Reports > Print Fonts
2Select PCL Fonts or PostScript Fonts.
bResend the print job.
Are you using fonts that are supported by the printer?
Go to step 2. Select a font that is
supported by the
printer.
Step 2
Check if the fonts installed on the computer are supported by the printer.
Are the fonts installed on the computer supported by the printer?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Clipped pages or images
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 278
Action Yes No
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•From the printer
control panel,
change the paper
size to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
•From the printer
control panel,
change the paper
type to match the
paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the page or image clipped?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Gray background on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Troubleshooting 279
Action Yes No
Step 1
Reduce the toner darkness.
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
density.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Did the gray background disappear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Horizontal voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMake sure your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aLoad the specified tray or feeder with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 280
Action Yes No
Step 3
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do horizontal voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Incorrect margins on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the paper size loaded.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Does the paper size match the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Troubleshooting 281
Action Yes No
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper size from
Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Are the margins correct?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Paper curl
Action Yes No
Step 1
Move the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions for
the size of the paper loaded.
Are the width and length guides positioned correctly?
Go to step 2. Adjust the width and
length guides.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the type and weight of the paper in
the tray?
Go to step 3. Specify the paper type
and weight from the
tray settings to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove the paper from the tray, and then turn it over.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the paper still curled?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 282
Print irregularities
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper size and type in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the size and type of the paper loaded in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
size from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Go to step 6. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 283
Action Yes No
Step 6
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do print irregularities still appear?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Print is too dark
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color
Adjust.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, reduce the toner
darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
aFrom the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight
in the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 4. Change the paper
loaded in the tray to
match the paper type,
texture, and weight
specified in the tray
settings.
Step 4
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 284
Action Yes No
Step 5
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded on
the tray.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too dark?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Print is too light
Action Yes No
Step 1
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color
Adjust.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the Quality menu on the printer control panel, increase the toner
darkness.
Note: 4 is the factory default setting.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 285
Action Yes No
Step 3
From the printer control panel, set the paper type, texture, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the tray set to the type, texture, and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 4. Specify the paper type,
texture, and weight
from the tray settings
to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 4
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Make sure that the paper has no texture or rough finishes.
Are you printing on textured or rough paper?
From the printer
control panel, set the
paper texture in the
Paper menu to match
the paper loaded in the
tray
Go to step 5.
Step 6
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Go to step 7. The problem is solved.
Step 7
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print still too light?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing blank pages
Troubleshooting 286
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if there is packing material left on the imaging kit.
1Remove the imaging kit.
2Check if the packing material is properly removed from the imaging
kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to
light may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
3Reinstall the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer still printing blank pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Printer is printing solid black pages
Action Yes No
Step 1
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the printer printing solid black pages?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 287
Repeating defects appear on prints
)
)
)
Action Yes No
aCheck if the distance between the defects is equal to one of the
following:
•25.1 mm (0.98 in.)
•29.8 mm (1.17 in.)
•43.9 mm (1.72 in.)
•45.5 mm (1.79 in.)
•94.2 mm (3.70 in.)
bIf the distance between the defects equals 25.1 mm (0.98 in.), 29.8 mm
(1.17 in.), or 94.2 mm (3.70 in.), then replace the photoconductor unit.
cIf the distance between the defects equals 43.9 mm (1.72 in.) or
45.5 mm (1.79 in.), then replace the developer unit.
Do the repeating defects still appear?
1Check if the
distance between
the defects is
equal to one of the
following:
•37.7 mm
(1.48 in.)
•78.5 mm
(3.09 in.)
•95 mm
(3.74 in.)
2Take note of the
distance, and then
contact customer
support or your
service
representative.
The problem is solved.
Shadow images appear on prints
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the paper loaded in the tray has the correct paper type and weight.
Is paper with the correct paper type and weight loaded in the tray?
Go to step 2. Load paper with the
correct paper type and
weight in the tray.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the printer settings match the type and weight of the paper loaded?
Go to step 3. Change the paper type
and weight to match
the paper loaded in the
tray.
Troubleshooting 288
Action Yes No
Step 3
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type and
weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do shadow images still appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Skewed print
) )
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aMove the width and length guides in the tray to the correct positions
for the size of the paper loaded.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aCheck if you are printing on a paper that is supported by the tray.
bResend the print job.
Is the print still skewed?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Streaked horizontal lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Troubleshooting 289
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the tray or feeder from
Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper type and weight in the Paper
menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper type and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
type and weight
from the tray
settings to match
the paper loaded in
the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
type and weight
specified in the tray
settings.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked horizontal lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 290
Streaked vertical lines appear on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aDepending on your operating system, specify the paper type, texture,
and weight from Printing Preferences or from the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
From the printer control panel, set the paper texture, type, and weight in
the Paper menu to match the paper loaded in the tray.
Do the paper texture, type, and weight match the paper in the tray?
Go to step 3. Do one or more of the
following:
•Specify the paper
texture, type, and
weight from the
tray settings to
match the paper
loaded in the tray.
•Change the paper
loaded in the tray
to match the paper
size specified in the
tray settings.
Step 3
aLoad paper from a fresh package.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to high humidity. Store paper in
its original wrapper until you use it.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 291
Action Yes No
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do streaked vertical lines appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Toner fog or background shading appears on prints
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
Action Yes No
Step 1
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Does fog or shading disappear from the prints?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Toner rubs off
Leading edge
Trailing edge
ABC
DEF
Troubleshooting 292
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the paper type,
texture, and weight.
Do the paper type, texture, and weight match the paper loaded in the
tray?
Go to step 2. Specify the paper type,
texture, and weight
from the tray settings
to match the paper
loaded in the tray.
Step 2
Resend the print job.
Does the toner still rub off?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Toner specks appear on prints
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do toner specks appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Transparency print quality is poor
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, set the paper type in the Paper menu to
match the paper loaded in the tray.
Is the paper type for the tray set to Transparency?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
aCheck if you are using a recommended type of transparency.
bResend the print job.
Is the print quality still poor?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Uneven print density
Troubleshooting 293
Action Yes No
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Is the print density uneven?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Vertical voids appear on prints
Leading edge
Trailing edge
Action Yes No
Step 1
aCheck if your software program is using a correct fill pattern.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Step 2
aFrom the Paper Menu on the printer control panel, check the paper
type and paper weight.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 3. The problem is solved.
Step 3
Check if you are using a recommended type of paper.
aLoad paper source with a recommended type of paper.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 4. The problem is solved.
Step 4
aRemove, and then reinstall the imaging kit.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not expose the imaging kit to
direct light for more than 10 minutes. Extended exposure to light
may cause print quality problems.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the
imaging kit. This could damage the imaging kit.
bResend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Go to step 5. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 294
Action Yes No
Step 5
Replace the imaging kit, and then resend the print job.
Do vertical voids appear on prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Color quality problems
FAQ about color printing
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors observed in
nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer monitors create
colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of red, green, or blue
needed to produce a certain color.
What is CMYK color?
Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses, inkjet printers,
and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors by indicating the
amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.
How is color specified in a document to be printed?
Software programs typically specify the document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. Additionally, they
let users modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the help information of your
operating system.
How does the printer know what color to print?
When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer. The
color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate amounts of
cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the color you want. The object information determines
the application of color conversion tables. For example, it is possible to apply one type of color conversion table to
text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.
What is manual color correction?
When manual color correction is enabled, the printer employs user‑selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user‑defined color conversion will be implemented.
Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images), and how
the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).
Notes:
•Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer operating
system controls the adjustment of colors.
•When Auto Color Correction is selected, the color conversion tables will generate preferred colors used for
the majority of the documents.
Troubleshooting 295
To manually apply a different color conversion table, do the following:
1From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Color Correction, and then select Manual.
2From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, select Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color
conversion table for the affected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image
RGB Text
RGB Graphics
•Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied
to all incoming color formats.
•sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors
displayed on a computer monitor.
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.
•Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the
colors displayed on a computer monitor. This uses only black toner
to create all levels of neutral gray.
•sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB
Display color correction.
Note: Black toner usage is optimized for printing business graphics.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK Image
CMYK Text
CMYK Graphics
•US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP
(Specifications for Web Offset Publishing) color output.
•Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate Euroscale
color output.
•Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color
correction setting.
•Off—No color correction is implemented.
How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?
Nine types of Color Samples sets are available from the Quality menu on the printer control panel. These are also
available from the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a
multiple‑page printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on
each box, depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB
combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
By examining Color Samples sets, you can identify the box whose color is the closest to the color you want. The color
combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software program. For
more information, see the help information of your operating system.
Note: Manual color correction may be necessary to utilize the selected color conversion table for the particular
object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color‑matching problem depends on the Color Correction
setting being used , the type of object being printed, and how the color of the object is specified in the software
program. When Color Correction is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information, and no color conversion
is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. Additionally, certain situations exist in which the software program or the computer operating
system adjusts the RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting
printed color may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.
Troubleshooting 296
Prints on color transparencies appear dark when projected
Note: This problem occurs when projecting transparencies with reflective overhead projectors. To obtain the highest
projected color quality, transmissive overhead projectors are recommended.
Action Yes No
Step 1
From the printer control panel, make sure the paper type setting is set to
Transparency.
Is the paper type setting correct?
Go to step 2. Set the paper type to
Transparency.
Step 2
Reduce the toner darkness, and then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Make sure you are using a recommended type of color transparency, and
then resend the print job.
Does the print on the color transparency look lighter?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
The color of the print does not match the color of the original file
Note: The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a
standard computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors,
there are many colors that can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.
Action Yes No
Step 1
aSet Color Correction to Off.
Note: When the printer color correction is disabled, the color is
based on the print job information, and no color conversion is
implemented.
bResend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer
screen?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
From the Quality menu on the printer control panel, do the following:
aSelect Color Correction, and then select Manual.
bSelect Manual Color, and then select the appropriate color conversion
table for the affected object type.
cResend the print job.
Does the color of the print match the color of the file on the computer
screen?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 297
The print appears tinted
Action Yes No
Adjust the color balance.
aFrom the Color Balance menu on the printer control panel, increase
or decrease the values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
bResend the print job.
Does the print still appear tinted?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Solving copy problems
•“Copier does not respond” on page 298
•“Scanner unit does not close” on page 299
•“Poor copy quality” on page 299
•“Partial document or photo copies” on page 300
Copier does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 3
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn it back
on.
Did Performing Self Test and Ready appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 298
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are no obstructions between the scanner unit and the
printer.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction that keeps the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close properly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Poor copy quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Does an error or status message appear?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution setting for a
higher‑quality output.
Step 3
If dark marks appear on prints, then clean the scanner glass and the ADF
glass using a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 204.
Step 4
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
aFrom the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
bFrom the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
cIf the print remains faded, then replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 5. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 278.
Step 5
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 6. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Troubleshooting 299
Action Yes No
Step 6
Check the copy settings.
From the Copy screen, check if the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Step 7
Check for patterns on print.
aFrom the printer control panel, navigate to:
Copy > Sharpness > select a lower setting
Note: Make sure no scaling is being selected.
bResend the copy job.
Do patterns appear on prints?
Go to step 8. The problem is solved.
Step 8
Check for missing or faded text on prints.
aFrom the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
•Sharpness—Increase the sharpness setting.
•Contrast—Increase the contrast setting.
bResend the copy job.
Do prints have missing or faded text?
Go to step 9. The problem is solved.
Step 9
Check for washed‑out or overexposed output.
aFrom the Copy screen, adjust the settings of the following:
•Background Removal—Reduce the current setting.
•Darkness—Increase the current setting.
bResend the copy job.
Do pages show washed‑out or overexposed prints?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Partial document or photo copies
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 2. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Troubleshooting 300
Action Yes No
Step 2
Check if the paper size setting matches the size of the paper loaded in the
tray.
From the Paper menu on the printer control panel, check the Paper
Size setting.
Does the paper size setting match the size of the paper loaded in the tray.
Go to step 3. Change the paper size
setting to match the
paper loaded in the
tray, or load the tray
with paper that
matches the paper size
setting.
Step 3
aSpecify the paper size. Depending on your operating system, specify
the paper size in Printing Preferences or the Print dialog.
bResend the print job.
Do copies print properly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Solving fax problems
Caller ID is not shown
Action Yes No
Contact your telephone company to check if your telephone line is
subscribed to the caller ID service.
Notes:
•If your region supports multiple caller ID patterns, then you may
have to change the default setting. There are two settings
available: FSK (pattern 1) and DTMF (pattern 2).
•The availability of these settings in the Fax menu depends on
whether your country or region supports multiple caller ID
patterns.
•Contact your telephone company to determine which pattern or
switch setting to use.
Does the caller ID appear?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 301
Cannot send or receive a fax
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error or status message appears on the display.
Is there an error or status message on the display?
Clear the error or status
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 3. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 3
Check the power.
Check if the printer is plugged in and turned on, and if Ready appears
on the display.
Is the printer turned on, and does Ready appear on the display?
Go to step 4. Turn on the printer,
and then wait until
Ready appears on the
display.
Step 4
Check the printer connections.
If applicable, check if the cable connections for the following
equipment are secure:
•Telephone
•Handset
•Answering machine
Are the cable connections secure?
Go to step 5. Securely connect the
cables.
Step 5
aCheck the telephone wall jack.
1Plug the telephone cable into the wall jack.
2Listen for a dial tone.
3If you do not hear a dial tone, then plug a different telephone cable
into the wall jack.
4If you still do not hear a dial tone, then plug the telephone cable
into a different wall jack.
5If you hear a dial tone, then connect the printer to that wall jack.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 6.
Troubleshooting 302
Action Yes No
Step 6
Check if the printer is connected to an analog phone service or the correct
digital connector.
The fax modem is an analog device. Certain devices can be connected
to the printer so that digital telephone services can be used.
•If you are using an ISDN telephone service, then connect the
printer to an analog telephone port (an R-interface port) on an
ISDN terminal adapter. For more information and to request an R-
interface port, contact your ISDN provider.
•If you are using DSL, then connect to a DSL filter or router that will
support analog use. For more information, contact your DSL
provider.
•If you are using a PBX telephone service, then make sure you are
connecting to an analog connection on the PBX. If none exists, then
consider installing an analog telephone line for the fax machine.
Is the printer connected to an analog phone service or the correct digital
connector?
Go to step 7. Connect the printer to
an analog phone
service or the correct
digital connector.
Step 7
Check for a dial tone.
Did you hear a dial tone?
Go to step 8. •Try calling the fax
number to make
sure that it is
working properly.
•If the telephone
line is being used by
another device,
then wait until the
other device is
finished before
sending a fax.
•If you are using the
On Hook Dial
feature, then turn
up the volume to
check if you hear a
dial tone.
Step 8
Temporarily disconnect other equipment (such as answering machines,
computers with modems, or telephone line splitters) between the printer
and the telephone line, and then try sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 9.
Step 9
aTemporarily disable call waiting. Contact your telephone company to
obtain the keypad sequence for temporarily disabling call waiting.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 10.
Troubleshooting 303
Action Yes No
Step 10
aTemporarily disable voice mail service. For more information, contact
your telephone company.
Note: If you want to use both voice mail and the printer, then
consider adding a second telephone line for the printer.
bTry sending or receiving a fax.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Go to step 11.
Step 11
Scan the original document one page at a time.
aDial the fax number.
bScan the document one page at a time.
Can you send or receive a fax?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Can send but not receive faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the tray or feeder.
If empty, then load paper in the tray or feeder.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the ring count delay settings.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the “Rings to Answer” field, enter the number of times you want
the phone to ring before the printer answers.
dClick Submit.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Troubleshooting 304
Action Yes No
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that came with the supply.
Can you receive faxes?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Can receive but not send faxes
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is in Fax mode.
From the home screen, touch Fax to put the printer in Fax mode, and
then send the fax.
Note: The Multi Send application does not support the XPS output type.
To use XPS, use the regular faxing method.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Load the original document properly.
Load the original document faceup, short edge first into the ADF tray
or facedown on the scanner glass in the upper left corner.
Note: Do not load postcards, photos, small items, transparencies, photo
paper, or thin media (such as magazine clippings) into the ADF tray.
Place these items on the scanner glass.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Set up the shortcut number properly.
•Check if the shortcut number has been set for the telephone number
that you want to dial.
•Dial the telephone number manually.
Can you send faxes?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Fax and e-mail functions are not set up
Notes:
•Before you troubleshoot, check if the fax cables are connected.
•The indicator light is blinking red until you set up fax and e‑mail.
Troubleshooting 305
Action Yes No
aFrom the home screen, navigate to:
> Settings > General Settings > Run initial setup > Yes > Submit
bTurn off the printer, and then turn it back on.
The “Select your language” screen appears on the printer display.
cSelect a language, and then touch .
dSelect a country or region, and then touch Next.
eSelect a time zone, and then touch Next.
fSelect Fax and E‑mail, and then touch Next.
Are fax and e‑mail functions set up?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Received fax has poor print quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Ask the person who sent you the fax to:
aCheck if the quality of the original document is satisfactory.
bIncrease the fax scan resolution, if possible.
cResend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 306
Action Yes No
Step 2
Decrease the incoming fax transmission speed.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
Notes:
•View the printer IP address on the printer home screen. The IP
address appears as four sets of numbers separated by periods,
such as 123.123.123.123.
•If you are using a proxy server, then temporarily disable it to
load the Web page correctly.
•Print a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
bClick Settings > Fax Settings > Analog Fax Setup.
cIn the Max Speed menu, click one of the following:
•2400
•4800
•9600
•14400
•33600
dClick Submit, and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Replace the toner cartridge.
When Cartridge low [88.xy] appears, replace the cartridge,
and then resend the fax.
Is the fax print quality satisfactory?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Solving scanner problems
•“The scanner does not respond” on page 308
•“Scan job was not successful” on page 309
•“Scanner unit does not close” on page 309
•“Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer” on page 309
•“Poor scanned image quality” on page 310
•“Partial document or photo scans” on page 311
•“Cannot scan from a computer” on page 311
Troubleshooting 307
The scanner does not respond
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if the printer is turned on.
Is the printer turned on?
Go to step 2. Turn on the printer.
Step 2
Check if the printer cable is securely attached to the printer and the
computer, print server, option, or other network device.
Is the printer cable securely attached to the printer and the computer,
print server, option, or other network device?
Go to step 3. Connect the printer
cable securely to the
printer and the
computer, print server,
option, or other
network device.
Step 3
Check if the power cord is plugged into the printer and a properly
grounded electrical outlet.
Is the power cord plugged into the printer and a properly grounded
electrical outlet?
Go to step 4. Connect the power
cord to the printer and
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Step 4
Check if the electrical outlet is turned off by a switch or breaker.
Is the electrical outlet turned off by a switch or breaker?
Turn on the switch or
reset the breaker.
Go to step 5.
Step 5
Check if the printer is plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible
power supplies, or extension cords.
Is the printer plugged into any surge protectors, uninterruptible power
supplies, or extension cords?
Connect the printer
power cord directly to
a properly grounded
electrical outlet.
Go to step 6.
Step 6
Check other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet.
Are the other electrical equipment working?
Unplug the other
electrical equipment
and turn on the printer.
If the printer does not
work, then reconnect
the other electrical
equipment and then go
to step 6.
Go to step 7.
Step 7
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Are the printer and scanner working?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Troubleshooting 308
Scan job was not successful
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the cable connections.
Make sure the Ethernet or USB cable is securely connected to the
computer and the printer.
Are the cables securely connected?
Go to step 2. Connect the cables
properly.
Step 2
Check if the file name is already in use.
Is the file name already in use?
Change the file name. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the document or photo you want to scan is open in another
application or being used by another user.
Is the file you want to scan open by another application or user?
Close the file you are
scanning.
Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if either the Append time stamp or the Overwrite existing file check
box is selected in the destination configuration settings.
Is the Append time stamp or Overwrite existing file check box selected
in the destination configuration settings?
Contact customer
support.
Select the Append time
stamp or Overwrite
existing file check box
in the destination
configuration settings.
Scanner unit does not close
Action Yes No
Check if there are obstructions in the scanner unit.
aLift the scanner unit.
bRemove any obstruction keeping the scanner unit open.
cLower the scanner unit.
Did the scanner unit close correctly?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Scanning takes too long or freezes the computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if other applications are interfering with the scan.
Close all applications that are not being used.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Go to step 2. The problem is solved.
Troubleshooting 309
Action Yes No
Step 2
Select a lower scan resolution.
Does scanning still take too long or freeze the computer?
Contact customer
support.
The problem is solved.
Poor scanned image quality
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check if an error message appears on the display.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 2.
Step 2
Check the quality of the original document.
Is the quality of the original document satisfactory?
Go to step 3. Increase the scan
resolution settings for a
higher‑quality output.
Step 3
Clean the scanner glass and the ADF glass using a clean, lint‑free cloth
dampened with water.
Is the scanner glass clean?
Go to step 4. See “Cleaning the
scanner glass” on
page 204.
Step 4
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Go to step 5. Place the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Step 5
Send a print job, and then check for print quality problems.
•From the General Settings menu, adjust the Eco‑Mode settings.
•From the Copy menu, adjust the Darkness setting.
•When the print becomes faded, replace the toner cartridge.
Is the print quality satisfactory?
Go to step 6. See “Print quality
problems” on
page 278.
Step 6
Check the scan settings.
From the Scan screen, make sure the Content Type and Content Source
settings are correct for the document being scanned.
Are the Content Type and Content Source settings correct for the
document being scanned?
Go to step 7. Change the Content
Type and Content
Source settings to
match the document
being scanned.
Troubleshooting 310
Action Yes No
Step 7
Increase the scan resolution settings for a higher‑quality output.
Did the increased resolution produce a higher‑quality output?
Problem solved. Contact customer
support.
Partial document or photo scans
Action Yes No
Check the placement of the document or photo.
Make sure the document or photo is loaded facedown on the scanner
glass in the upper left corner.
Is the document or photo loaded correctly?
Contact customer
support.
Load the document or
photo facedown on the
scanner glass in the
upper left corner.
Cannot scan from a computer
Action Yes No
Step 1
Make sure the printer is turned on and that Ready appears on the printer
display before scanning a job.
Does Ready appear before scanning the job?
Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Step 2
Turn off the printer, then wait for about 10 seconds, and then turn the
printer back on.
Is there an error message on the printer display?
Clear the error
message.
Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check the cable connections between the printer and the print server to
make sure they are secure.
For more information, see the setup documentation that came with
the printer.
Are the cable connections between the printer and the print server
secure?
Contact customer
support.
Tighten the cable
connections.
Solving home screen application problems
•“An application error has occurred” on page 312
Troubleshooting 311
An application error has occurred
Action Yes No
Step 1
Check the system log for relevant details.
aOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address in the
address field.
If you do not know the IP address of the printer, then you can:
•View the IP address on the printer home screen.
•Print a network setup page or the menu settings pages, and then
locate the IP address in the TCP/IP section.
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated by
periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bClick Settings > Apps > Apps Management > System tab > Log.
cFrom the Filter menu, select an application status.
dFrom the Application menu, select an application, and then click
Submit.
Does an error message appear in the log?
Go to step 2. Contact customer
support.
Step 2
Resolve the error.
Is the application working now?
The problem is solved. Contact customer
support.
Embedded Web Server does not open
Action Yes No
Step 1
aTurn on the printer.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Go to step 2.
Troubleshooting 312
Action Yes No
Step 2
Make sure the printer IP address is correct.
aView the printer IP address:
•From the TCP/IP section in the Network/Ports menu
•By printing a network setup page or menu settings page, and then
finding the TCP/IP section
Note: An IP address appears as four sets of numbers separated
by periods, such as 123.123.123.123.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the IP address.
Note: Depending on the network settings, you may need to type
“https://” instead of “http://” before the printer IP address
to access the Embedded Web Server.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Go to step 3.
Step 3
Check if the network is working.
aPrint a network setup page.
bCheck the first section of the network setup page and confirm that the
status is Connected.
Note: If the status is Not Connected, then the connection may be
intermittent, or the network cable may be defective. Contact your
system support person for a solution, and then print another
network setup page.
cOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
dPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Go to step 4.
Step 4
Check if the cable connections to the printer and print server are secure.
aConnect the cables properly. For more information, see the setup
documentation that came with the printer.
bOpen a Web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
cPress Enter.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Go to step 5.
Step 5
Temporarily disable the Web proxy servers.
Proxy servers may block or restrict you from accessing certain Web
sites including the Embedded Web Server.
Does the Embedded Web Server open?
The problem is solved. Contact your system
support person.
Troubleshooting 313
Contacting customer support
When you contact customer support, you will need to be able to describe the problem you are experiencing, the message
on the printer display, and the troubleshooting steps you have already taken to find a solution.
You need to know your printer model type and serial number. For more information, see the label at the back of the
printer. The serial number is also listed on the menu settings page.
Lexmark has various ways to help you solve your printing problem. Visit the Lexmark Web site at
http://support.lexmark.com, and then select one of the following:
Tech Library You can browse our library of manuals, support documentation, drivers, and other downloads to help you
solve common problems.
E-mail You can send an e-mail to the Lexmark team, describing your problem. A service representative will respond
and provide you with information to solve your problem.
Live chat You can chat directly with a service representative. They can work with you to solve your printer problem or
provide assistance through Assisted Service where the service representative can remotely connect to your
computer through the Internet to troubleshoot problems, install updates, or complete other tasks to help
you successfully use your Lexmark product.
Telephone support is also available. In the U.S. or Canada, call 1-800-539-6275. For other countries or regions, visit
http://support.lexmark.com.
Troubleshooting 314
Notices
Product information
Product name:
Lexmark CX410e and CX410de
Machine type:
7527
Model(s):
415, 436
Edition notice
September 2014
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain
transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the
information herein; these changes will be incorporated in later editions. Improvements or changes in the products or
the programs described may be made at any time.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make
these available in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to
state or imply that only that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program,
or service that does not infringe any existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification
of operation in conjunction with other products, programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the
manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.
For Lexmark technical support, visit http://support.lexmark.com.
For information on supplies and downloads, visit www.lexmark.com.
© 2014 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
GOVERNMENT END USERS
The Software Program and any related documentation are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R.
2.101, "Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 or 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7207-4,
as applicable, the Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Software Documentation are licensed to the U.S.
Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users
pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
Notices 315
Licensing notices
All licensing notices associated with this product can be viewed from the root directory of the installation software CD.
Trademarks
Lexmark, Lexmark with diamond design, MarkNet, and MarkVision are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc.,
registered in the United States and/or other countries.
Mac and the Mac logo are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a
set of printer commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be
compatible with the PCL language. This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application
programs, and that the printer emulates the functions corresponding to the commands.
The following terms are trademarks or registered trademarks of these companies:
Albertus The Monotype Corporation plc
Antique Olive Monsieur Marcel OLIVE
Apple-Chancery Apple Computer, Inc.
Arial The Monotype Corporation plc
CG Times Based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of
Agfa Corporation
Chicago Apple Computer, Inc.
Clarendon Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Eurostile Nebiolo
Geneva Apple Computer, Inc.
GillSans The Monotype Corporation plc
Helvetica Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Hoefler Jonathan Hoefler Type Foundry
ITC Avant Garde Gothic International Typeface Corporation
ITC Bookman International Typeface Corporation
ITC Mona Lisa International Typeface Corporation
ITC Zapf Chancery International Typeface Corporation
Joanna The Monotype Corporation plc
Marigold Arthur Baker
Monaco Apple Computer, Inc.
New York Apple Computer, Inc.
Oxford Arthur Baker
Palatino Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Stempel Garamond Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
Notices 316
Taffy Agfa Corporation
Times New Roman The Monotype Corporation plc
Univers Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple, Inc.
Noise emission levels
The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO 9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
1-meter average sound pressure, dBA
Printing 51
Scanning 50
Copying 50
Ready 16
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive
The WEEE logo signifies specific recycling programs and procedures for electronic products in countries of the European
Union. We encourage the recycling of our products.
If you have further questions about recycling options, visit the Lexmark Web site at www.lexmark.com for your local
sales office phone number.
India E-Waste notice
This product complies with the India E-Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 2011, which prohibit use of lead,
mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated biphenyls, or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations
exceeding 0.1％ by weight and 0.01% by weight for cadmium, except for the exemption set in Schedule II of the Rules.
Notices 317
Product disposal
Do not dispose of the printer or supplies in the same manner as normal household waste. Consult your local authorities
for disposal and recycling options.
Static sensitivity notice
This symbol identifies static-sensitive parts. Do not touch in the areas near these symbols without first touching the
metal frame of the printer.
ENERGY STAR
Any Lexmark product bearing the ENERGY STAR emblem on the product or on a start-up screen is certified to comply
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) ENERGY STAR requirements as configured when shipped by Lexmark.
Temperature information
Ambient operating temperature 15.6 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F)
Shipping temperature -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
Storage temperature and relative humidity 2 to 35°C (34 to 95°F)
8 to 80% RH
Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for Class I
(1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825-1.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains internally a Class IIIb (3b) laser that is
nominally a 7 milliwatt gallium arsenide laser operating in the wavelength of 655-675 nanometers. The laser system
and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal
operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service condition.
Notices 318
Laser advisory label
A laser notice label may be affixed to this printer as shown:
DANGER - Invisible laser radiation when cartridges are removed and interlock defeated. Avoid exposure to laser beam.
PERIGO - Radiação a laser invisível será liberada se os cartuchos forem removidos e o lacre rompido. Evite a exposição aos feixes de laser.
Opasnost - Nevidljivo lasersko zračenje kada su kasete uklonjene i poništena sigurnosna veza. Izbjegavati izlaganje zracima.
NEBEZPEČÍ - Když jsou vyjmuty kazety a je odblokována pojistka, ze zařízení je vysíláno neviditelné laserové záření. Nevystavujte se působení laserového paprsku.
FARE - Usynlig laserstråling, når patroner fjernes, og spærreanordningen er slået fra. Undgå at blive udsat for laserstrålen.
GEVAAR - Onzichtbare laserstraling wanneer cartridges worden verwijderd en een vergrendeling wordt genegeerd. Voorkom blootstelling aan de laser.
DANGER - Rayonnements laser invisibles lors du retrait des cartouches et du déverrouillage des loquets. Eviter toute exposition au rayon laser.
VAARA - Näkymätöntä lasersäteilyä on varottava, kun värikasetit on poistettu ja lukitus on auki. Vältä lasersäteelle altistumista.
GEFAHR - Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung beim Herausnehmen von Druckkassetten und offener Sicherheitssperre. Laserstrahl meiden.
ΚΙΝΔΥΝΟΣ - Έκλυση αόρατης ακτινοβολίας laser κατά την αφαίρεση των κασετών και την απασφάλιση της μανδάλωσης. Αποφεύγετε την έκθεση στην ακτινοβολία laser.
VESZÉLY – Nem látható lézersugárzás fordulhat elő a patronok eltávolításakor és a zárószerkezet felbontásakor. Kerülje a lézersugárnak való kitettséget.
PERICOLO - Emissione di radiazioni laser invisibili durante la rimozione delle cartucce e del blocco. Evitare l´esposizione al raggio laser.
FARE – Usynlig laserstråling når kassettene tas ut og sperren er satt ut av spill. Unngå eksponering for laserstrålen.
NIEBEZPIECZEŃSTWO - niewidzialne promieniowanie laserowe podczas usuwania kaset i blokady. Należy unikać naświetlenia promieniem lasera.
ОПАСНО! Невидимое лазерное излучение при извлеченных картриджах и снятии блокировки. Избегайте воздействия лазерных лучей.
Pozor – Nebezpečenstvo neviditeľného laserového žiarenia pri odobratých kazetách a odblokovanej poistke. Nevystavujte sa lúčom.
PELIGRO: Se producen radiaciones láser invisibles al extraer los cartuchos con el interbloqueo desactivado. Evite la exposición al haz de láser.
FARA – Osynlig laserstrålning när patroner tas ur och spärrmekanismen är upphävd. Undvik exponering för laserstrålen.
危险 - 当移除碳粉盒及互锁失效时会产生看不见的激光辐射，请避免暴露在激光光束下。
危險 - 移除碳粉匣與安全連續開關失效時會產生看不見的雷射輻射。請避免曝露在雷射光束下。
危険 - カートリッジが取り外され、内部ロックが無効になると、見えないレーザー光が放射されます。 このレーザー光に当たらないようにしてください。
Power consumption
Product power consumption
The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.
Mode Description Power consumption
(Watts)
Printing The product is generating hard‑copy output from electronic inputs. 600 (one-sided); 380 (two-
sided)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy output from hard‑copy original documents. 640
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy documents. 55
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 35
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level energy‑saving mode. 3
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level energy‑saving mode. 0.5
Off The product is plugged into an electrical outlet, but the power switch is turned
off.
0
The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements. Instantaneous
power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.
Notices 319
Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by lowering
power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged after this product
is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.
Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 20
By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes. Setting
the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response time of the product.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more energy.
Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in Hibernate
Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
•Using the Hibernate Timeout
•Using the Schedule Power modes
•Using the Sleep/Hibernate button
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days
The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified between
one hour and one month.
Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product power
consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.
Total energy usage
It is sometimes helpful to calculate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are provided in
power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends in each mode in
order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's energy usage.
Regulatory notices for electromagnetic compatibility
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to electromagnetic compatibility.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) compliance information statement
This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Notices 320
The FCC Class B limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment
is operated in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
•Consult your point of purchase or service representative for additional suggestions.
The manufacturer is not responsible for radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended
cables or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could
void the user's authority to operate this equipment.
Note: To assure compliance with FCC regulations on electromagnetic interference for a Class B computing device,
use a properly shielded and grounded cable such as Lexmark part number 1021231 for parallel attach or 1021294 for
USB attach. Use of a substitute cable not properly shielded and grounded may result in a violation of FCC
regulations.
Any questions regarding this compliance information statement should be directed to:
Director of Lexmark Technology & Services
Lexmark International, Inc.
740 West New Circle Road
Lexington, KY 40550
(859) 232–3000
Industry Canada compliance statement
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Standard
ICES-003.
Avis de conformité aux normes de l’industrie du Canada
Cet appareil numérique de classe B est conforme aux exigences de la norme canadienne relative aux équipements
pouvant causer des interférences NMB-003.
日本の VCCI 規定
製品にこのマークが表示されている場合、次の要件を満たしています。
この装置は、クラス B 情報技術装置です。この装置は、家庭環境で使用することを目的としていますが、この
装置がラジオやテレビジョン受信機に近接して使用されると、受信障害を引き起こすことがあります。
取扱説明書に従って正しい取り扱いをしてください。
VCCI-B
Notices 321
European Community (EC) directives conformity
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to
electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, the
ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and
electronic equipment.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Regulatory notices for telecommunication terminal equipment
This section contains regulatory information pertaining to products that contain telecommunication terminal
equipment such as facsimile.
Notice to users of the US telephone network: FCC requirements
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the Administrative Council
for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a
product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to your telephone
company.
This equipment uses the RJ-11C Universal Service Order Code (USOC) jack.
A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises’ wiring and telephone network must comply with the
applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is
provided with this product. It is designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See your
setup documentation for more information.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be
connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact your local telephone company. For products approved
after July 23, 2001, the REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX.
The digits represented by ## are the REN without a decimal point (for example, 03 is a REN of 0.3). For earlier products,
the REN is shown separately on the label.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that
temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will
notify the customer as soon as possible. You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could affect the
operation of this equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to
make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
If you experience trouble with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, contact Lexmark International, Inc.
at www.lexmark.com or your Lexmark representative. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
Notices 322
This equipment contains no user serviceable parts. For repair and warranty information, contact Lexmark International,
Inc. See the previous paragraph for contact information.
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service
commission, or corporation commission for information.
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation of this
equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable alarm equipment,
consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter's
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic
device, including fax machines, to send any message unless said message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification
of the business or other entity, or other individual sending the message, and the telephone number of the sending
machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided may not be a 900 number or
any other number for which charges exceed local or long-distance transmission charges.)
See your user documentation in order to program this information into your fax machine.
Notice to users of the Canadian telephone network
This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications. The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is
an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The terminus of
an interface may consist of any combination of devices, subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of
all the devices does not exceed five. The modem REN is located on the rear of the equipment on the product labeling.
Telephone companies report that electrical surges, typically lightning transients, are very destructive to customer
terminal equipment connected to AC power sources. This has been identified as a major nationwide problem. It is
recommended that the customer install an appropriate AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is
connected. An appropriate AC surge arrestor is defined as one that is suitably rated, and certified by UL (Underwriter’s
Laboratories), another NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory), or a recognized safety certification body in
the country/region of use. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical
surges.
This equipment uses CA11A telephone jacks.
Avis réservé aux utilisateurs du réseau téléphonique du Canada
Ce produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques d’Industrie Canada. Le numéro REN (ringer equivalence number :
numéro d’équivalence de sonnerie) fournit une indication du nombre maximum de terminaux pouvant être connectés
à l’interface téléphonique. En bout de ligne, le nombre d’appareils qui peuvent être connectés n’est pas directement
limité, mais la somme des REN de ces appareils ne doit pas dépasser cinq. Le numéro REN du modem est indiqué sur
l’étiquette produit située à l’arrière de l’équipement.
Les compagnies de téléphone constatent que les surtensions électriques, en particulier celles dues à la foudre,
entraînent d'importants dégâts sur les terminaux privés connectés à des sources d’alimentation CA. Il s’agit-là d’un
problème majeur d’échelle nationale. En conséquence, il vous est recommandé de brancher un parasurtenseur dans
Notices 323
la prise de courant à laquelle l’équipement est connecté. Utilisez un parasurtenseur répondant à des caractéristiques
nominales satisfaisantes et certifié par le laboratoire d’assureurs UL (Underwriter’s Laboratories), un autre laboratoire
agréé de type NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory) ou un organisme de certification agréé dans votre région
ou pays. Ceci prévient tout endommagement de l’équipement causé par les orages et autres surtensions électriques.
Cet équipement utilise des prises de téléphone CA11A.
Industry Canada (Canada)
This device complies with Industry Canada specification RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate only with the antenna provided. Use of any other antenna is strictly prohibited
per regulations of Industry Canada.
To prevent radio interference to the licensed service, this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from
windows to provide maximum shielding. Equipment (or its transmit antenna) that is installed outdoors is subject to
licensing.
The installer of this radio equipment must ensure that the antenna is located or pointed such that it does not emit RF
fields in excess of Health Canada limits for the general population; consult Safety Code 6, obtainable from Health
Canada's Web site www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
The term "IC:" before the certification/registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
Industry Canada (Canada)
Cet appareil est conforme à la norme RSS-210 d'Industry Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes :
(1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d'interférences et (2) il doit accepter toute interférence reçue, y compris celles
risquant d'altérer son fonctionnement.
Cet appareil a été conçu pour fonctionner uniquement avec l'antenne fournie. L'utilisation de toute autre antenne est
strictement interdite par la réglementation d'Industry Canada.
En application des réglementations d'Industry Canada, l'utilisation d'une antenne de gain supérieur est strictement
interdite.
Pour empêcher toute interférence radio au service faisant l'objet d'une licence, cet appareil doit être utilisé à l'intérieur
et loin des fenêtres afin de garantir une protection optimale.
Si le matériel (ou son antenne d'émission) est installé à l'extérieur, il doit faire l'objet d'une licence.
L'installateur de cet équipement radio doit veiller à ce que l'antenne soit implantée et dirigée de manière à n'émettre
aucun champ HF dépassant les limites fixées pour l'ensemble de la population par Santé Canada. Reportez-vous au
Code de sécurité 6 que vous pouvez consulter sur le site Web de Santé Canada www.hc-sc.gc.ca/rpb.
Le terme « IC » précédant le numéro de d'accréditation/inscription signifie simplement que le produit est conforme
aux spécifications techniques d'Industry Canada.
Notices 324
Notice to users of the New Zealand telephone network
The following are special conditions for the Facsimile User Instructions. The grant of a telepermit for any item of terminal
equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection
to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above
all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of telepermitted
equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network
services.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom's 111 Emergency Service.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a nuisance to other Telecom
customers.
Some parameters required for compliance with Telecom's telepermit requirements are dependent on the equipment
associated with this device. The associated equipment shall be set to operate within the following limits for compliance
to Telecom's specifications:
•There shall be no more than 10 call attempts to the same number within any 30 minute period for any single manual
call initiation, and
•The equipment shall go on-hook for a period of not less than 30 seconds between the end of one attempt and the
beginning of the next call attempt.
•The equipment shall be set to ensure that automatic calls to different numbers are spaced such that there is not
less than 5 seconds between the end of one call attempt and the beginning of another.
Japanese telecom notice
The installed optional modem is in compliance with Japanese Telecommunication Law and has been Certified by JATE,
with Certification Number A11-0160001.
Lexmark International, Inc.
LEX-M03-002
A11-0160001JP
Using this product in Switzerland
This product requires a Swiss billing tone filter (Lexmark part number 80D1877) to be installed on any line which receives
metering pulses in Switzerland. The filter must be used, as metering pulses are present on all analog telephone lines
in Switzerland.
Notices 325
Utilisation de ce produit en Suisse
Cet appareil nécessite l’utilisation d’un filtre de tonalité de facturation suisse (nº de référence Lexmark : 80D1877)
devant être installé sur toute ligne recevant des impulsions de comptage en Suisse. Ce filtre doit être utilisé pour toute
installation car ces impulsions existent sur toutes les lignes téléphoniques suisses.
Verwendung dieses Produkts in der Schweiz
Für dieses Produkt muss ein schweizerischer Billing Tone Filter zur Zählzeichenübertragung (Lexmark Teilenummer
80D1877) für jede Leitung installiert werden, über die in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte übertragen werden. Die
Verwendung des Filters ist obligatorisch, da in allen analogen Telefonleitungen in der Schweiz Zeitsteuertakte
vorhanden sind.
Uso del prodotto in Svizzera
Questo prodotto richiede un filtro toni Billing svizzero, (codice Lexmark 80D1877) da installare su tutte le linee che
ricevono impulsi remoti in Svizzera. È necessario utilizzare il filtro poiché gli impulsi remoti sono presenti su tutte le
linee analogiche in Svizzera.
Notice to Users in the European Union
Products bearing the CE mark are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC,
2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, 2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, the ecodesign of energy-related
products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Refer to the table at the end of the Notices section for further compliance information.
Regulatory notices for wireless products
This section contains the following regulatory information pertaining to wireless products that contain transmitters,
for example, but not limited to, wireless network cards or proximity card readers.
Notices 326
Modular component notice
This product may contain the following modular component(s):
Lexmark Regulatory Type/Model LEX-M01-005, FCC ID: IYLLEXM01005; IC:2376A-M01005
Exposure to radio frequency radiation
The radiated output power of this device is far below the radio frequency exposure limits of the FCC and other regulatory
agencies. A minimum separation of 20 cm (8 inches) must be maintained between the antenna and any persons for
this device to satisfy the RF exposure requirements of the FCC and other regulatory agencies.
Notice to users in the European Union
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC,
1999/5/EC, 2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and harmonization of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits,
radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the
restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product satisfies the Class B limits of EN 55022 and safety requirements of EN 60950‑1.
Products equipped with 2.4GHz Wireless LAN option are in conformity with the protection requirements of EC Council
directives 2004/108/EC, 2006/95/EC, 1999/5/EC, 2009/125/EC, and 2011/65/EU on the approximation and
harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility, safety of electrical
equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits, radio equipment and telecommunications terminal
equipment, the ecodesign of energy-related products, and on the restrictions of use of certain hazardous substances
in electrical and electronic equipment.
Compliance is indicated by the CE marking.
Operation is allowed in all EU and EFTA countries, but is restricted to indoor use only.
The manufacturer of this product is: Lexmark International, Inc., 740 West New Circle Road, Lexington, KY, 40550 USA.
The authorized representative is: Lexmark International Technology Hungária Kft., 8 Lechner Ödön fasor, Millennium
Tower III, 1095 Budapest HUNGARY. A declaration of conformity to the requirements of the Directives is available upon
request from the Authorized Representative.
This product may be used in the countries indicated in the table below.
Notices 327
AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE
EL ES FI FR HR HU IE IS IT
LI LT LU LV MT NL NO PL PT
RO SE SI SK TR UK
Česky Společnost Lexmark International, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že výrobek tento výrobek je ve shodě se základními
požadavky a dalšími příslušnými ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved, at dette produkt overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige relevante
krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch Hiermit erklärt Lexmark International, Inc., dass sich das Gerät dieses Gerät in Übereinstimmung mit den
grundlegenden Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befindet.
Ελληνική ΜΕ ΤΗΝ ΠΑΡΟΥΣΑ Η LEXMARK INTERNATIONAL, INC. ΔΗΛΩΝΕΙ ΟΤΙ ΑΥΤΟ ΤΟ ΠΡΟΪΟΝ
ΣΥΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕΤΑΙ ΠΡΟΣ ΤΙΣ ΟΥΣΙΩΔΕΙΣ ΑΠΑΙΤΗΣΕΙΣ ΚΑΙ ΤΙΣ ΛΟΙΠΕΣ ΣΧΕΤΙΚΕΣ ΔΙΑΤΑΞΕΙΣ
ΤΗΣ ΟΔΗΓΙΑΣ 1999/5/ΕΚ.
English Hereby, Lexmark International, Inc., declares that this type of equipment is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español Por medio de la presente, Lexmark International, Inc. declara que este producto cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Eesti Käesolevaga kinnitab Lexmark International, Inc., et seade see toode vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ
põhinõuetele ja nimetatud direktiivist tulenevatele muudele asjakohastele sätetele.
Suomi Lexmark International, Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä tuote on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten
ja muiden sitä koskevien direktiivin ehtojen mukainen.
Français Par la présente, Lexmark International, Inc. déclare que l'appareil ce produit est conforme aux exigences
fondamentales et autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Magyar Alulírott, Lexmark International, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a termék megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ
követelményeknek és az 1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Íslenska Hér með lýsir Lexmark International, Inc. yfir því að þessi vara er í samræmi við grunnkröfur og aðrar
kröfur, sem gerðar eru í tilskipun 1999/5/EC.
Italiano Con la presente Lexmark International, Inc. dichiara che questo questo prodotto è conforme ai requisiti
essenziali ed alle altre disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski Ar šo Lexmark International, Inc. deklarē, ka šis izstrādājums atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām
prasībām un citiem ar to saistītajiem noteikumiem.
LietuviųŠiuo Lexmark International, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis produktas atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas
1999/5/EB direktyvos nuostatas.
Malti Bil-preżenti, Lexmark International, Inc., jiddikjara li dan il-prodott huwa konformi mal-ħtiġijiet
essenzjali u ma dispożizzjonijiet oħrajn relevanti li jinsabu fid-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands Hierbij verklaart Lexmark International, Inc. dat het toestel dit product in overeenstemming is met de essentiële
eisen en de andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk Lexmark International, Inc. erklærer herved at dette produktet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Notices 328
Polski Niniejszym Lexmark International, Inc. oświadcza, że niniejszy produkt jest zgodny z zasadniczymi
wymogami oraz pozostałymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português A Lexmark International Inc. declara que este este produto está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Diretiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovensky Lexmark International, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že tento produkt spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky
príslušné ustanovenia smernice 1999/5/ES.
Slovensko Lexmark International, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta izdelek v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi
relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Svenska Härmed intygar Lexmark International, Inc. att denna produkt står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
STATEMENT OF LIMITED WARRANTY FOR LEXMARK LASER PRINTERS,
LEXMARK LED PRINTERS, AND LEXMARK MULTIFUNCTION LASER PRINTERS
Lexmark International, Inc., Lexington, KY
This limited warranty applies to the United States and Canada. For customers outside the U.S., refer to the country-
specific warranty information that came with your product.
This limited warranty applies to this product only if it was originally purchased for your use, and not for resale, from
Lexmark or a Lexmark Remarketer, referred to in this statement as “Remarketer.”
Limited warranty
Lexmark warrants that this product:
—Is manufactured from new parts, or new and serviceable used parts, which perform like new parts
—Is, during normal use, free from defects in material and workmanship
If this product does not function as warranted during the warranty period, contact a Remarketer or Lexmark for repair
or replacement (at Lexmark's option).
If this product is a feature or option, this statement applies only when that feature or option is used with the product
for which it was intended. To obtain warranty service, you may be required to present the feature or option with the
product.
If you transfer this product to another user, warranty service under the terms of this statement is available to that user
for the remainder of the warranty period. You should transfer proof of original purchase and this statement to that
user.
Limited warranty service
The warranty period starts on the date of original purchase as shown on the purchase receipt and ends 12 months later
provided that the warranty period for any supplies and for any maintenance items included with the printer shall end
earlier if it, or its original contents, are substantially used up, depleted, or consumed. Fuser Units, Transfer/Transport
Units, Paper Feed items, if any, and any other items for which a Maintenance Kit is available are substantially consumed
when the printer displays a “Life Warning” or “Scheduled Maintenance” message for such item.
Notices 329
To obtain warranty service you may be required to present proof of original purchase. You may be required to deliver
your product to the Remarketer or Lexmark, or ship it prepaid and suitably packaged to a Lexmark designated location.
You are responsible for loss of, or damage to, a product in transit to the Remarketer or the Lexmark designated location.
When warranty service involves the exchange of a product or part, the item replaced becomes the property of the
Remarketer or Lexmark. The replacement may be a new or repaired item.
The replacement item assumes the remaining warranty period of the original product.
Replacement is not available to you if the product you present for exchange is defaced, altered, in need of a repair not
included in warranty service, damaged beyond repair, or if the product is not free of all legal obligations, restrictions,
liens, and encumbrances.
As part of your warranty service and/or replacement, Lexmark may update the firmware in your printer to the latest
version. Firmware updates may modify printer settings and cause counterfeit and/or unauthorized products, supplies,
parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces to stop working. Authorized use of genuine Lexmark
products will not be impacted.
Before you present this product for warranty service, remove all print cartridges, programs, data, and removable storage
media (unless directed otherwise by Lexmark).
For further explanation of your warranty alternatives and the nearest Lexmark authorized servicer in your area contact
Lexmark on the World Wide Web.
Remote technical support is provided for this product throughout its warranty period. For products no longer covered
by a Lexmark warranty, technical support may not be available or only be available for a fee.
Extent of limited warranty
Lexmark does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of any product or the durability or longevity of prints
produced by any product.
Warranty service does not include repair of failures caused by:
—Modification or unauthorized attachments
—Accidents, misuse, abuse or use inconsistent with Lexmark user’s guides, manuals, instructions or guidance
—Unsuitable physical or operating environment
—Maintenance by anyone other than Lexmark or a Lexmark authorized servicer
—Operation of a product beyond the limit of its duty cycle
—Use of printing media outside of Lexmark specifications
—Refurbishment, repair, refilling or remanufacture by a third party of products, supplies or parts
—Products, supplies, parts, materials (such as toners and inks), software, or interfaces not furnished by Lexmark
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NEITHER LEXMARK NOR ITS THIRD PARTY SUPPLIERS OR
REMARKETERS MAKE ANY OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH
RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND SATISFACTORY QUALITY. ANY WARRANTIES THAT
MAY NOT BE DISCLAIMED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD. NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WILL APPLY AFTER THIS PERIOD. ALL INFORMATION, SPECIFICATIONS, PRICES,
AND SERVICES ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE.
Notices 330
Limitation of liability
Your sole remedy under this limited warranty is set forth in this document. For any claim concerning performance or
nonperformance of Lexmark or a Remarketer for this product under this limited warranty, you may recover actual
damages up to the limit set forth in the following paragraph.
Lexmark's liability for actual damages from any cause whatsoever will be limited to the amount you paid for the product
that caused the damages. This limitation of liability will not apply to claims by you for bodily injury or damage to real
property or tangible personal property for which Lexmark is legally liable. IN NO EVENT WILL LEXMARK BE LIABLE FOR
ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST SAVINGS, INCIDENTAL DAMAGE, OR OTHER ECONOMIC OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
This is true even if you advise Lexmark or a Remarketer of the possibility of such damages. Lexmark is not liable for any
claim by you based on a third party claim.
This limitation of remedies also applies to claims against any Suppliers and Remarketers of Lexmark. Lexmark's and its
Suppliers' and Remarketers' limitations of remedies are not cumulative. Such Suppliers and Remarketers are intended
beneficiaries of this limitation.
Additional rights
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or do not allow the exclusion or limitation
of incidental or consequential damages, so the limitations or exclusions contained above may not apply to you.
This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other rights that vary from state to state.
Patent acknowledgment
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Elliptic Curve Cryptography (ECC) Cipher Suites for Transport
Layer Security (TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Elliptic Curve Cipher Suites with SHA-256/382 and AES Galois
Counter Mode (GCM) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for TLS Suite B Profile for Transport Layer Security (TLS) implemented
in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Addition of the Camellia Cipher Suites to Transport Layer Security
(TLS) implemented in the product or service.
The use of certain patents in this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the
Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for AES-CCM ECC Cipher Suites for TLS
implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for IKE and IKEv2 Authentication Using the Eliptic Curve Digital
Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) implemented in the product or service.
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Suite B Cryptographic Suites for IPSec implemented in the
product or service.
Notices 331
The use of this product or service is subject to the reasonable, non-discriminatory terms in the Intellectual Property
Rights (IPR) Disclosure of Certicom Corp. at the IETF for Algorithms for Internet Key Exchange version 1 (IKEv1)
implemented in the product or service.
Notices 332
Index
Numerics
250‑sheet tray
loading 41
550‑sheet tray
installing 32
loading 41
650‑sheet duo tray
installing 32
loading 41, 45
Symbols
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 251
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 251
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 251
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 263
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 263
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 263
[x]-page jam, open front door
[20y.xx] 242
[x]-page jam, open front door to
clear fuser [202.xx] 239
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[251.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
feeder [250.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin
[203.xx] 236
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 248
[x]‑page jam, open front door to
clear duplex [23y.xx] 243
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]
[24y.xx] 244
A
accessing the Embedded Web
Server 18
Active NIC menu 131
adapter plug 99
adding hardware options
print driver 35
ADF
copying using 69
Adjust ADF Skew
copy options 81
e‑mail options 88
fax options 111
scan options 118
adjusting brightness
Embedded Web Server 196
printer display 196
Adjusting color 250
adjusting copy quality 74
adjusting Sleep mode 195
adjusting toner darkness 62
administrator settings
Embedded Web Server 229
advanced duplex
copy options 79
advanced imaging
copy options 80
e‑mail options 88
fax options 111
scan screen 118
answering machine
setting up 91
AppleTalk menu 136
applications
home screen 20
understanding 19
attaching cables 34
available internal options 25
avoiding jams 57
avoiding paper jams 233
B
black‑and‑white printing 61
blocking junk faxes 107
buttons, touch screen
using 16
C
cables
Ethernet 34
USB 34
cancel button
printer control panel 14
canceling a copy job 77
canceling a print job
from a computer 68
from the printer control panel 68
canceling an e-mail 85
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 312
Card Copy
setting up 21
card stock
loading 46
tips 54
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 250
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 250
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 250
changing output file type
e‑mailing 85
checking an unresponsive
printer 264
checking status of parts and
supplies 205
checking the status of parts and
supplies 205
checking the virtual display
using the Embedded Web
Server 229
cleaning
exterior of the printer 203
interior of the printer 203
scanner glass 204
cleaning the printer 203
clear all / reset button
printer control panel 14
Close door 250
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 251
collate
copy options 78
collating copies 75
color quality troubleshooting
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 297
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when projected 297
Index 333
color quality, troubleshooting
print appears tinted 298
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 251
confidential data
information on securing 202
confidential jobs
modifying print settings 67, 231
confidential print jobs 65
printing from a Macintosh
computer 66
printing from Windows 66
Confidential Print menu 140
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 252
configuration information
wireless network 36
configurations
printer 11
configuring
multiple printers 231
supply notifications, imaging
kit 230
supply notifications, maintenance
kit 230
supply notifications, toner
cartridge 230
supply notifications, waste toner
bottle 230
configuring supply notifications
from the Embedded Web
Server 230
connecting printer to distinctive
ring service 102
connecting to a wireless network
using PIN (Personal Identification
Number) method 38
using Push Button Configuration
method 38
using the Embedded Web
Server 39
using wireless setup wizard 37
conservation settings
brightness, adjusting 196
conserving supplies 193
Eco‑Mode 194
Hibernate mode 195
Hibernate Timeout 195
Quiet Mode 194
Schedule Power Modes 196
Sleep Mode 195
conserving supplies 193
contacting customer support 314
content
e‑mail settings 87
content source
e‑mail settings 87
fax options 110
content type
e‑mail settings 87
fax options 110
control panel
indicator light 16
Sleep button light 16
controller board
accessing 26
copies
copy options 78
copy job, canceling
using the ADF 77
using the scanner glass 77
copy options
Adjust ADF Skew 81
advanced duplex 79
advanced imaging 80
collate 78
copies 78
cover page setup 80
create booklet 80
custom job 80
darkness 78
header/footer 80
overlay 80
paper saver 80
Save As Shortcut 79
separator sheets 80
sides (duplex) 78
copy quality
adjusting 74
copy screen
content source 79
content type 79
options 78, 79
Copy Settings menu 150
copy troubleshooting
copier does not respond 298
partial document or photo
copies 300
poor copy quality 299
poor scanned image quality 310
scanner unit does not
close 299, 309
copying
adding an overlay message 77
adjusting quality 74
canceling a copy job 77
collating copies 75
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 71
different paper sizes 72
enlarging 73
inserting a header or footer 76
multiple pages on one sheet 76
on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 73
on letterhead 71
on transparencies 70
photos 70
placing separator sheets between
copies 75
quick copy 69
reducing 73
selecting a tray 72
to a different size 71
using the ADF 69
using the scanner glass 70
copying different paper sizes 72
copying multiple pages on one
sheet 76
copying on both sides of the paper
(duplexing) 73
copying on letterhead 71
copying on transparencies 70
cover page setup
copy options 80
create booklet
copy options 80
creating a fax destination shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 106
creating an FTP shortcut
using the Embedded Web
Server 112
creating custom name
paper type 49
custom job
copy options 80
e‑mail options 87
fax options 111
scan options 118
custom name
configuring 50
Custom Names menu 128
custom paper type name
assigning 49
Custom Scan Sizes menu 129
Index 334
Custom Type [x]
changing paper type 50
creating custom name 49
Custom Types menu 128
customer support
contacting 314
D
darkness
copy options 78
e‑mail options 86
fax options 109
scan options 116
date and time, fax
setting 103
daylight saving time, setting 103
Default Source menu 120
Defective flash detected [51] 252
delayed send
fax options 111
developer unit
replacing 212, 221
device and network settings
information
erasing 200
different paper sizes, copying 72
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
fax setup 95
digital telephone service
fax setup 97
directory list
printing 67
Disk full 62 252
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 252
disk wiping 201
display
printer control panel 14
display troubleshooting
printer display is blank 266
display, printer control panel
adjusting brightness 196
disposing of printer hard disk 199
distinctive ring service, fax
connecting to 102
documents, printing
from Macintosh 61
from Windows 61
DSL filter 95
duplexing 73
E
Eco‑Mode setting 194
edge erase
e‑mail options 88
fax options 111
scan options 118
embedded solutions information
erasing 200
Embedded Web Server 230
accessing 18
administrator settings 229
checking the status of parts 205
checking the status of
supplies 205
copying settings to other
printers 231
creating a fax destination
shortcut 106
creating an FTP shortcut 112
creating e‑mail shortcuts 82
initial fax setup 90
modifying confidential print
settings 67, 231
networking settings 229
problem accessing 312
scanning to a computer using 114
setting up e‑mail alerts 229
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator's Guide
where to find 229
Embedded Web Server — Security:
Administrator’s Guide
where to find 202
emission
notices 317, 320, 321, 322, 324,
327
encrypting the printer hard
disk 201
enlarging a copy 73
envelopes
loading 44, 46
tips on using 53
environmental settings
conserving supplies 193
display brightness, adjusting 196
Eco‑Mode 194
Hibernate mode 195
Hibernate Timeout 195
Quiet Mode 194
Schedule Power Modes 196
Sleep Mode 195
Erase Temporary Data Files
menu 141
erasing hard disk memory 201
erasing non‑volatile memory 200
erasing volatile memory 200
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 252
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 252
Ethernet network
preparing to set up for Ethernet
printing 36
Ethernet port 34
Ethernet setup
preparing for an 36
exporting a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
EXT port 34
exterior of the printer
cleaning 203
e‑mail
canceling 85
e‑mail alerts
low supply levels 229
paper jam 229
setting up 229
e‑mail function
setting up 82
e‑mail options
Adjust ADF Skew 88
advanced imaging 88
custom job 87
darkness 86
edge erase 88
message 86
original size 86
page setup 87
recipient(s) 86
resolution 86
Save As Shortcut 86
Send As 86
subject 86
transmission log 88
e‑mail screen
options 86, 87
E‑mail Settings menu 165
e‑mail shortcuts, creating
using the Embedded Web
Server 82
e‑mail, sending
using a shortcut number 84
Index 335
using the address book 84
e‑mailing
adding message line 85
adding subject line 85
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 82
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 83
setting up e‑mail function 82
using a shortcut number 84
using the address book 84
using the printer control panel 83
F
factory defaults
restoring 231
FAQ about color printing 295
fax
sending using the printer control
panel 103
fax and e‑mail functions
setting up 305
fax and e‑mail functions are not set
up 305
fax log
viewing 107
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup)
menu 155
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup)
menu 163
fax name, setting 102
fax number, setting 102
fax options
Adjust ADF Skew 111
advanced imaging 111
content source 110
content type 110
custom job 111
darkness 109
delayed send 111
edge erase 111
page setup 110
resolution 109
scan preview 111
transmission log 110
fax screen
options 110
fax setup
country‑ or region‑specific 99
digital telephone service 97
DSL connection 95
standard telephone line
connection 91
VoIP 96
fax troubleshooting
caller ID is not shown 301
can receive but not send
faxes 305
can send but not receive
faxes 304
cannot send or receive a fax 302
received fax has poor print
quality 306
faxing
blocking junk faxes 107
canceling a fax job 108
changing resolution 106
configuring the printer to observe
daylight saving time 103
creating shortcuts using the
Embedded Web Server 106
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 106
distinctive ring service 102
fax setup 90
forwarding faxes 109
holding faxes 108
making a fax lighter or darker 107
sending a fax at a scheduled
time 105
setting the date and time 103
setting the fax number 102
setting the outgoing fax name 102
viewing a fax log 107
FCC notices 320, 322, 327
file name
scan options 116
finding more information about the
printer 9
finding printer IP address 18
Finishing menu 180
firmware card 25
flash drive
printing from 63
Flash Drive menu 174
flash drives
supported file types 64
font sample list
printing 67
footer
inserting 76
Forms and Favorites
setting up 20
forwarding faxes 109
FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
printer control panel 113
FTP options 116
FTP address, scanning to
using a shortcut number 113
using the printer control
panel 113
FTP options
FTP address 116
FTP screen
options 116
FTP Settings menu 170
G
General Settings menu 143
green settings
Eco‑Mode 194
Hibernate mode 195
Hibernate Timeout 195
Quiet Mode 194
Schedule Power Modes 196
H
hardware options, adding
print driver 35
header
inserting 76
header/footer
copy options 80
held jobs 65
printing from a Macintosh
computer 66
printing from Windows 66
Help menu 191
Hibernate mode
using 195
Hibernate Timeout
setting 195
hiding icons on the home screen 19
holding faxes 108
home button
printer control panel 14
home screen
buttons, understanding 14
customizing 19
hiding icons 19
showing icons 19
home screen applications
configuring 20
Index 336
finding information 20
home screen buttons
understanding 14
HTML menu 190
I
icons on the home screen
hiding 19
showing 19
Image menu 191
imaging kit
replacing 212
imaging kits
ordering 207
importing a configuration
using the Embedded Web
Server 24
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 252
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 253
indicator light
printer control panel 14
individual settings information
erasing 200
initial fax setup 90
using the Embedded Web
Server 90
Insert Tray [x] 253
inserting a header or footer 76
installing an optional card 30
installing options
order of installation 31
installing printer 35
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 253
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 253
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 253
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 253
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored [37] 254
interior of the printer
cleaning 203
internal options 25
IP address of computer
finding 18
IP address, printer
finding 18
IPv6 menu 135
J
jams
avoiding 233
locating doors and trays 234
locations 234
messages 234
jams, clearing
in automatic document feeder top
cover 248
in fuser area 239
in manual feeder 246
in multipurpose feeder 246
in standard bin 236
Tray 1 244
Tray 2 244
Job Accounting menu 183
K
keypad
printer control panel 14
L
labels, paper
tips 53
letterhead
copying on 71
loading, multipurpose feeder 51
loading, trays 51
line filter 95
LINE port 34
linking trays 48, 49
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 254
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 254
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 254
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 255
loading
250‑sheet tray 41
550‑sheet tray 41
650‑sheet duo tray 41, 45
card stock 46
envelopes 44, 46
manual feeder 44
multipurpose feeder 46
transparencies 46
loading letterhead
paper orientation 51
lock, security 199
M
maintenance kit
ordering 207
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 256
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 256
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 256
making copies using paper from
selected tray 72
manual feeder
loading 44
Max Speed and Max Yield
using 62
memory
types installed on printer 199
memory card 25
installing 28
troubleshooting 268
Memory full [38] 256
menu settings
loading on multiple printers 231
menu settings page
printing 39
menus
Active NIC 131
AppleTalk 136
Confidential Print 140
Copy Settings 150
Custom Names 128
Custom Scan Sizes 129
Custom Types 128
Default Source 120
Erase Temporary Data Files 141
E‑mail Settings 165
Fax Mode (Analog Fax Setup) 155
Fax Mode (Fax Server Setup) 163
Finishing 180
Flash Drive 174
FTP Settings 170
General Settings 143
Help 191
Index 337
HTML 190
Image 191
IPv6 135
Job Accounting 183
list of 119
Miscellaneous Security
Settings 139
Network [x] 131
Network Card 133
Network Reports 133
Paper Loading 127
Paper Size/Type 121
Paper Texture 124
Paper Weight 125
PCL Emul 187
PDF 186
PostScript 186
Quality 181
Reports 130
Security Audit Log 142
Set Date and Time 142
Setup 179
SMTP Setup menu 138
Standard Network 131
Standard USB 137
Substitute Size 124
Supplies 120
TCP/IP 133
Universal Setup 129
Utilities 185
Wireless 135
XPS 186
message
e‑mail options 86
Miscellaneous Security Settings
menu 139
mobile device
printing from 65
moving the printer 10, 227
Multi Send
adding a profile 22
setting up 22
multipurpose feeder
loading 46
MyShortcut
about 21
N
Network [x] menu 131
Network [x] software error
[54] 256
Network Card menu 133
Network Reports menu 133
network settings
Embedded Web Server 229
network setup page
printing 40
Networking Guide
where to find 229
noise emission levels 317
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type],
see User's Guide [33.xy] 257
non‑volatile memory 199
erasing 200
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 257
notices 316, 317, 318, 319, 320,
321, 322, 323, 324, 325, 326, 327
number of remaining pages
estimate 205
O
optional card
installing 30
options
550‑sheet tray 32
650‑sheet duo tray 32
firmware cards 25
memory card 28
memory cards 25
options, copy screen
copy from 78
edge erase 79
margin shift 79
scale 78
options, touch‑screen
copy 78, 79
e‑mail 86, 87
fax 110
FTP 116
ordering
imaging kits 207
maintenance kit 207
toner cartridges 206
waste toner bottle 208
original size
e‑mail options 86
scan options 116
output file type
changing 85
scan image 117
overlay
copy options 80
P
page setup
e‑mail options 87
fax options 110
scan options 117
paper
characteristics 54
different sizes, copying 72
letterhead 56
preprinted forms 56
recycled 56, 193
saving 76
selecting 55
storing 57
unacceptable 55
Universal size setting 41
paper feed troubleshooting
message remains after jam is
cleared 270
paper jams
avoiding 233
paper jams, clearing
[x]-page jam, open front door
[20y.xx] 242
[x]-page jam, open front door to
clear fuser [202.xx] 239
[x]‑page jam, open front door to
clear duplex [23y.xx] 243
in automatic document feeder top
cover 248
in fuser area 239
in manual feeder 246
in multipurpose feeder 246
in standard bin 236
Tray 1 244
Tray 2 244
Paper Loading menu 127
paper saver
copy options 80
paper size
setting 41
Paper Size/Type menu 121
paper sizes
supported by the printer 57
Paper Texture menu 124
paper type
setting 41
paper types
supported by printer 59
Paper Weight menu 125
Index 338
paper weights
supported by printer 59
parts
checking status 205
checking, on the printer control
panel 205
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 205
using genuine Lexmark 206
PCL Emul menu 187
PDF menu 186
Personal Identification Number
method
using 38
phone splitter 96
photos
copying 70
placing separator sheets between
copies 75
PostScript menu 186
power cord socket 34
preparing to set up the printer on
an Ethernet network 36
print driver
hardware options, adding 35
print irregularities 283
print job
canceling, from computer 68
print quality
cleaning the scanner glass 204
replacing a developer unit 221
replacing imaging kit 212
replacing the waste toner
bottle 208
print quality troubleshooting
blank pages 286
characters have jagged edges 278
clipped pages or images 278
gray background on prints 279
horizontal voids appear on
prints 280
print irregularities 283
print is too dark 284
print is too light 285
printer is printing solid black
pages 287
repeating print defects 288
shadow images appear on
prints 288
skewed print 289
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 289
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 291
toner fog or background shading
appears on prints 292
toner rubs off 292
toner specks appear on prints 293
transparency print quality is
poor 293
uneven print density 293
vertical voids appear on
prints 294
print troubleshooting
error reading flash drive 272
held jobs do not print 271
incorrect characters print 272
incorrect margins on prints 281
jammed pages are not
reprinted 269
job prints from wrong tray 273
job prints on wrong paper 273
jobs do not print 275
Large jobs do not collate 273
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 274
paper curl 282
paper frequently jams 269
print job takes longer than
expected 276
printing slows down 274
tray linking does not work 277
unexpected page breaks
occur 277
printer 35
configurations 11
minimum clearances 10
models 11
moving 10, 227
selecting a location 10
shipping 228
printer control panel
factory defaults, restoring 231
using 14
printer control panel, virtual
display
using the Embedded Web
Server 229
printer hard disk
disposing of 199
encrypting 201
wiping 201
printer hard disk encryption 201
printer hard disk memory
erasing 201
printer information
where to find 9
printer IP address
finding 18
printer is printing blank pages 286
printer messages
[Color] cartridge low [88.xy] 251
[Color] cartridge nearly low
[88.xy] 251
[Color] cartridge very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 251
[Type] imaging kit low [84.xy] 263
[Type] imaging kit nearly low
[84.xy] 263
[Type] imaging kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 263
[x]‑page jam, clear manual feeder
[251.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, clear multipurpose
feeder [250.xx] 246
[x]‑page jam, clear standard bin
[203.xx] 236
[x]‑page jam, open automatic
feeder top cover. [28y.xx] 248
[x]‑page jam, open tray [x]
[24y.xx] 244
Adjusting color 250
Change [paper source] to [custom
string] 250
Change [paper source] to [custom
type name] 250
Change [paper source] to [paper
type] [paper size] 250
Close door 250
Close flatbed cover and load
originals if restarting job
[2yy.xx] 251
Complex page, some data may not
have printed [39] 251
Configuration change, some held
jobs were not restored [57] 252
Defective flash detected [51] 252
Disk full 62 252
Disk must be formatted for use in
this device 252
Error reading USB drive. Remove
USB. 252
Index 339
Error reading USB hub. Remove
hub. 252
Incompatible tray [x] [59] 252
Incorrect paper size, open [paper
source] [34] 253
Insert Tray [x] 253
Insufficient memory for Flash
Memory Defragment operation
[37] 253
Insufficient memory to collate job
[37] 253
Insufficient memory to support
Resource Save feature [35] 253
Insufficient memory, some Held
Jobs were deleted [37] 253
Insufficient memory, some held
jobs will not be restored
[37] 254
Load [paper source] with [custom
string] 254
Load [paper source] with [custom
type name] 254
Load [paper source] with [paper
size] 254
Load [paper source] with [paper
type] [paper size] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
string] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [custom
type name] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
size] 255
Load Manual Feeder with [paper
type] [paper size] 255
Maintenance kit low [80.xy] 256
Maintenance kit nearly low
[80.xy] 256
Maintenance kit very low, [x]
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 256
Memory full [38] 256
Network [x] software error
[54] 256
Non-Lexmark [color] [supply type],
see User's Guide [33.xy] 257
Not enough free space in flash
memory for resources [52] 257
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
[color] cartridge [31.xy] 257
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 258
Remove defective disk [61] 259
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 258
Remove paper from standard
output bin 258
Replace [color] cartridge, 0
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 258
Replace [color] cartridge, printer
region mismatch [42.xy] 258
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 259
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 259
Replace defective [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 259
Replace defective [type] imaging
kit [31.xy] 259
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 260
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 260
Replace missing [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 260
Replace missing [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 260
Replace missing or unresponsive
[type] imaging kit [31.xy] 257
Replace missing waste toner
bottle [82.xy] 260
Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge [32.xy] 260
Replace unsupported [type]
imaging kit [32.xy] 261
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 261
Restore held jobs? 261
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 261
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 261
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 261
Scanner jam access cover
open 261
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 261
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 262
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 262
Some held jobs were not
restored 262
Standard network software error
[54] 262
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 262
Supply needed to complete
job 262
Too many flash options installed
[58] 263
Too many trays attached [58] 263
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 264
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 252
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 264
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 264
printer options troubleshooting
internal option is not
detected 267
memory card 268
tray problems 268
printer problems, solving basic 264
printer security
information on 202
printing
black‑and‑white 61
canceling, from printer control
panel 68
directory list 67
font sample list 67
forms 61
from a mobile device 65
from flash drive 63
from Macintosh 61
from Windows 61
Max Speed and Max Yield 62
menu settings page 39
network setup page 40
printing a directory list 67
printing a document 61
printing a font sample list 67
printing a menu settings page 39
printing a network setup page 40
printing confidential and other held
jobs
from a Macintosh computer 66
from Windows 66
Index 340
printing forms 61
printing from a flash drive 63
printing from a mobile device 65
printing in black and white 61
publications
where to find 9
Push Button Configuration method
using 38
Q
Quality menu 181
Quiet Mode 194
R
recipient(s)
e‑mail options 86
recycled paper
using 56, 193
recycling
Lexmark packaging 197
Lexmark products 197
toner cartridges 198
reducing a copy 73
reducing noise 194
Reinstall missing or unresponsive
[color] cartridge [31.xy] 257
Reload printed pages in Tray
[x] 258
remaining pages, number of
estimate 205
Remote Operator Panel
setting up 23
Remove defective disk [61] 259
Remove packaging material, [area
name] 258
Remove paper from standard
output bin 258
repeat print jobs 65
printing from a Macintosh
computer 66
printing from Windows 66
repeating print defects 288
Replace [color] cartridge, 0
estimated pages remain
[88.xy] 258
Replace [color] cartridge, printer
region mismatch [42.xy] 258
Replace [type] imaging kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[84.xy] 259
Replace all originals if restarting
job. 259
Replace defective [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 259
Replace defective [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 259
Replace jammed originals if
restarting job. 260
Replace maintenance kit, 0
estimated pages remain
[80.xy] 260
Replace missing [color] cartridge
[31.xy] 260
Replace missing [type] imaging kit
[31.xy] 260
Replace missing or unresponsive
[type] imaging kit [31.xy] 257
Replace missing waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 260
Replace unsupported [color]
cartridge [32.xy] 260
Replace unsupported [type]
imaging kit [32.xy] 261
Replace waste toner bottle
[82.xy] 261
reports
viewing 229
Reports menu 130
reserve print jobs
printing from a Macintosh
computer 66
printing from Windows 66
resolution
e‑mail options 86
fax options 109
scan options 116
resolution, fax
changing 106
Restore held jobs? 261
restoring factory default
settings 231
RJ‑11 adapter 99
S
safety information 7, 8
Save As Shortcut
copy options 79
e‑mail options 86
scan options 116
saving paper 76
scan image
output file type 117
scan options
Adjust ADF Skew 118
custom job 118
darkness 116
edge erase 118
file name 116
original size 116
page setup 117
resolution 116
Save As Shortcut 116
Scan Preview 118
Send As 117
transmission log 117
Scan Preview
scan options 118
scan preview
fax options 111
scan screen
advanced imaging 118
content source 117
content type 117
Scan to Computer
setting up 115
Scan to Network
setting up 22
using 112
scan troubleshooting
cannot scan from a computer 311
partial document or photo
scans 311
scan job was not successful 309
scanner unit does not
close 299, 309
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 309
scanner
automatic document feeder
(ADF) 13
functions 12
scanner glass 13
Scanner automatic feeder cover
open 261
Scanner disabled by admin
[840.01] 261
Scanner disabled. Contact system
administrator if problem persists.
[840.02] 261
scanner glass
cleaning 204
copying using 70
Scanner jam access cover open 261
Index 341
Scanner jam, remove all originals
from the scanner [2yy.xx] 261
Scanner jam, remove jammed
originals from the scanner
[2yy.xx] 262
scanning
from a flash drive 115
quick copy 69
to a computer using the
Embedded Web Server 114
scanning to a computer 115
using the Embedded Web
Server 114
scanning to a flash drive 115
scanning to an FTP address
creating shortcuts using the
computer 112
using a shortcut number 113
using the printer control
panel 113
scanning to network
destinations 112
Schedule Power Modes
using 196
security
modifying confidential print
settings 67, 231
Security Audit Log menu 142
security lock 199
security lock port 34
security settings information
erasing 200
security Web page
where to find 202
selecting a location for the
printer 10
selecting paper 55
Send As
e‑mail options 86
scan options 117
sending a fax using the
computer 104
sending a fax using the printer
control panel 103
sending an e‑mail using the printer
control panel 83
sending fax
using shortcuts 104
using the address book 105
sending fax at a scheduled
time 105
separator sheets
copy options 80
Set Date and Time menu 142
setting
paper size 41
paper type 41
TCP/IP address 133
setting Hibernate Timeout 195
setting the fax number 102
setting the outgoing fax name 102
setting the Universal paper size 41
setting up e‑mail alerts 229
setting up fax
country‑ or region‑specific 99
digital telephone service 97
DSL connection 95
standard telephone line
connection 91
VoIP connection 96
setting up fax and e‑mail
functions 305
Setup menu 179
shipping the printer 228
shortcuts, creating
copy screen 71
e‑mail 82
e‑mail screen 83
fax destination 106
FTP address 113
FTP destination 112
showing icons on the home
screen 19
sides (duplex)
copy options 78
sleep button
printer control panel 14
Sleep Mode
adjusting 195
SMTP server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 262
SMTP Setup menu 138
Some held jobs were not
restored 262
Standard Network menu 131
Standard network software error
[54] 262
standard tray
loading 41
Standard USB menu 137
Standard USB port disabled
[56] 262
start button
printer control panel 14
statement of volatility 199
status of parts
checking 205
status of supplies
checking 205
storing
paper 57
supplies 203
storing print jobs 65
streaked horizontal lines appear on
prints 289
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 291
subject and message information
adding to e‑mail 85
Substitute Size menu 124
supplies
checking status 205
checking, on the printer control
panel 205
checking, using the Embedded
Web Server 205
conserving 193
storing 203
using genuine Lexmark 206
using recycled paper 193
Supplies menu 120
supplies, ordering
imaging kits 207
maintenance kit 207
toner cartridges 206
waste toner bottle 208
Supply needed to complete job 262
supply notifications
configuring 230
supported flash drives 64
supported paper types 59
supported paper weights 59
T
TCP/IP menu 133
telecommunication
notices 322, 323, 325, 326
the scanner does not respond 308
tips
card stock 54
labels, paper 53
on using envelopes 53
on using letterhead 51
transparencies 53
Index 342
tips on using envelopes 53
tips on using letterhead 51
toner cartridges
ordering 206
recycling 198
replacing 219
toner darkness
adjusting 62
Too many flash options installed
[58] 263
Too many trays attached [58] 263
touch screen
buttons 16
transmission log
e‑mail options 88
fax options 110
scan options 117
transparencies
copying on 70
loading 46
tips on using 53
trays
linking 48, 49
unlinking 48, 49
troubleshooting
an application error has
occurred 312
cannot open Embedded Web
Server 312
checking an unresponsive
printer 264
contacting customer support 314
FAQ about color printing 295
fax and e‑mail functions are not
set up 305
solving basic printer
problems 264
the scanner does not respond 308
troubleshooting, color quality
color of print and color on
computer screen do not
match 297
print appears tinted 298
prints on color transparencies
appear dark when projected 297
troubleshooting, copy
copier does not respond 298
partial document or photo
copies 300
poor copy quality 299
poor scanned image quality 310
scanner unit does not
close 299, 309
troubleshooting, display
printer display is blank 266
troubleshooting, fax
caller ID is not shown 301
can receive but not send
faxes 305
can send but not receive
faxes 304
cannot send or receive a fax 302
received fax has poor print
quality 306
troubleshooting, paper feed
message remains after jam is
cleared 270
troubleshooting, print
error reading flash drive 272
held jobs do not print 271
incorrect characters print 272
incorrect margins on prints 281
jammed pages are not
reprinted 269
job prints from wrong tray 273
job prints on wrong paper 273
jobs do not print 275
Large jobs do not collate 273
multiple‑language PDF files do not
print 274
paper curl 282
paper frequently jams 269
print job takes longer than
expected 276
printing slows down 274
tray linking does not work 277
unexpected page breaks
occur 277
troubleshooting, print quality
blank pages 286
characters have jagged edges 278
clipped pages or images 278
gray background on prints 279
horizontal voids appear on
prints 280
print irregularities 283
print is too dark 284
print is too light 285
printer is printing solid black
pages 287
repeating print defects 288
shadow images appear on
prints 288
skewed print 289
streaked horizontal lines appear
on prints 289
streaked vertical lines appear on
prints 291
toner fog or background shading
appears on prints 292
toner rubs off 292
toner specks appear on prints 293
transparency print quality is
poor 293
uneven print density 293
vertical voids appear on
prints 294
troubleshooting, printer options
internal option is not
detected 267
memory card 268
tray problems 268
troubleshooting, scan
cannot scan from a computer 311
partial document or photo
scans 311
scan job was not successful 309
scanner unit does not
close 299, 309
scanning takes too long or freezes
the computer 309
U
understanding the home screen 14
uneven print density 293
Unformatted flash detected
[53] 264
Universal Paper Size
setting 41
Universal Setup menu 129
unlinking trays 48, 49
Unsupported USB hub, please
remove 252
USB port 34
printer control panel 14
using a shortcut number
scanning to an FTP address 113
using Forms and Favorites 61
using Hibernate mode 195
using Max Speed and Max Yield 62
using Schedule Power Modes 196
using shortcuts
sending fax 104
using the address book
sending fax 105
Index 343
using the touch‑screen buttons 16
Utilities menu 185
V
verify print jobs 65
printing from a Macintosh
computer 66
printing from Windows 66
vertical voids appear on prints 294
viewing
reports 229
viewing a fax log 107
virtual display
checking, using Embedded Web
Server 229
voice mail
setting up 91
Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP)
fax setup 96
VoIP adapter 96
volatile memory 199
erasing 200
volatility
statement of 199
W
waste toner bottle
ordering 208
replacing 208
Waste toner bottle nearly full
[82.xy] 264
Weblink server not set up. Contact
system administrator. 264
wiping the printer hard disk 201
Wireless menu 135
wireless network
configuration information 36
wireless network setup
using the Embedded Web
Server 39
wireless setup wizard
using 37
X
XPS menu 186
Index 344

Navigation menu